E/Pro Programming Reference

For printer models:

CL408/412e
CL608/612e
M8400RVe
M5900RVe
M8459/60/85/90Se
CT400/410, D508/D512
M84Pro
M10e
XL400/410e
LM408/412e
CG208/212
CG408/412
TG308/312

PN: 9001096E

www.satoamerica.com
 SATO America, Inc.
10350 Nations Ford Road
Charlotte, NC 28273
Main Phone: (704) 644.1650
Technical Support: (704) 644.1660
Technical Support Fax: (704) 644.1661
E-Mail: [email protected]
www.satoamerica.com
© Copyright 2010 SATO America, Inc.
All rights reserved.

Reproduction in any manner of all or part of this document is prohibited.

The content of this document may be changed without prior notice.

Great care has been taken in the preparation of this document. If any problems, mistakes, or omissions are found,
please contact your SATO reseller or technical support center.

FCC Statement

The printer complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class B Computing Device. Operating
the printer in a residential area may cause unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception. If the interference
is unacceptable, you can reposition the equipment, which may improve reception.
 PRINTER REFERENCE TABLE
Each printer model (product) applicable to this document has been assigned a reference letter character and is
listed below. The Table Of Contents identifies specific commands and the products to which they apply.

• CL408/412e (A)
• CL608/612e (B)
• M8400RVe (C)
• M5900RVe (D)
• M8459/60/85/90Se (E)
• CT400/410, D508/D512 (F)
• M84Pro (G)
• M10e (H)
• XL400/410e (I)
• LM408/412e (J)
• CG208/212 (K)
• CG408/412 (L)
• TG308/312 (M)

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
About This Manual 1-2
Print Area Calculation 1-3

PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS
Programming Language 2-2
Selecting Protocol Codes 2-3
Using Basic 2-4
Print Position Commands 2-6

COMMAND CODE QUICK REFERENCE

A: <ESC>A Start Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-2
<ESC>~A Cut, Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M) 3-2
<ESC>~a Cut, Job (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I) 3-2
<ESC>~(NULL) Multiple Cuts (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, M) 3-2
<ESC>~B Cut, Last (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H) 3-2
<ESC>AO Auto Online (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J) 3-2
<ESC>A1 Media Size (dots) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L, M) 3-2
<ESC>A1 Media Size (mm) (Applicable Product: I, M) 3-2
<ESC>& Form Overlay, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-2
<ESC>AR Standard Print Area (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, J) 3-2
<ESC>&R Form Overlay, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-2
<ESC>&S Form Overlay, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-3
<ESC>* Clear (Memory Card) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M) 3-3
<ESC>* System Clear (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I) 3-3
<ESC>@ Offline/Pause (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-3
<ESC>A3 Start Point Correction (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-3
<ESC>AX Print Area Enlargement (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, J) 3-3
B: <ESC>B Barcode, Ratio 1:3 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-4
<ESC>BC CODE 93 Barcode (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-4
<ESC>BD Barcode, Ratio 2:5 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-4
<ESC>BF Bookland (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-4
<ESC>BG CODE 128 Barcode (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-4
<ESC>BI UCC/EAN 128 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-5
<ESC>BJ/BJD True Type Font, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, M) 3-5
<ESC>BJF Card, Format (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, M) 3-5
<ESC>BJS Print Memory Card Status (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, M) 3-5
<ESC>BJT True Type Font, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, M) 3-5
<ESC>BK PDF 417 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-6
<ESC>BL UPC-A Barcode (No HRI) (Applicable Product: I, K, L, M) 3-6
<ESC>BL~d UPC-A Barcode (with HRI) (Applicable Product: I, L, M) 3-6
<ESC>BM UPC-A Barcode (with HRI) (Applicable Product: I, K, L, M) 3-7
<ESC>BP Postnet (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-7
<ESC>BQ QR Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-7
<ESC>BT Variable Ratio Barcodes (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-8
<ESC>BV Maxi Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-8
<ESC>BW Barcode Expansion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-8
<ESC>BX Data Matrix Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-8
C: <ESC>C Repeat Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-9
<ESC>CB Tearoff Correction (Applicable Product: L) 3-9
<ESC>CI Sensor Selection (Applicable Product: L) 3-9
<ESC>CC Card, Slot Specification (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M) 3-9
<ESC>CL CR/LF Deletion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-9
<ESC>CR Serial Port (Applicable Product: L) 3-9
<ESC>CP Ribbon (Applicable Product: L) 3-9
<ESC>CS Print Speed (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-10
<ESC>CT Cut Number Unit (Applicable Product: I, K, L, M) 3-10
D: <ESC>D Barcode, Ratio 1:2 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-10
<ESC>d/D~ Barcode, Human Readable Information (HRI) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-10
<ESC>DC Data Matrix Code, Data (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-10
<ESC>DI Interface (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-10
<ESC>$ Font, Vector (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M) 3-11

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

 <ESC>$= Outline Font Print (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M) 3-11
E: <ESC>E Line Feed (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-11
<ESC>EJ Media Ejection (Applicable Product: I, M) 3-11
<ESC>EP Print End Position (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-11
<ESC>EU EAN/UCC Composite Symbol (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-11
<ESC>EX Memory Area Enlarge Specification (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J) 3-11
<ESC>EX0 Print Length Expansion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, L) 3-11
F: <ESC>F Sequential Numbering (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-12
<ESC>FC Print Circles (Applicable Product: M) 3-12
<ESC>FT Print Triangles (Applicable Product: M) 3-12
<ESC>FM Format Memory Card (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-12
<ESC>FP Print Memory Card Status (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-12
<ESC>FW Printing, Lines & Boxes (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-13
<ESC>FX Data Matrix Code, Sequential Number (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-13
G: <ESC>G Graphics, Custom (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-13
<ESC>GC BMP File, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-13
<ESC>GI Graphic, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-13
<ESC>GM Graphics, BMP File (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-13
<ESC>GP Graphics, PCX File (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-13
<ESC>GR Graphic, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-14
<ESC>GT BMP File, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-14
H: <ESC>H Horizontal Print Position (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-14
I: <ESC>I Batch Separator (Applicable Product: I, M) 3-14
<ESC>I2 Serial Interface (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-14
<ESC>I3 LAN Interface (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-14
<ESC>ID Job Store ID (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-14
<ESC>IG Sensor Type Selection (Applicable Product: F, K, L) 3-15
<ESC>I1 IEEE1284 (Applicable Product: L) 3-15
J: <ESC>J Journal Printing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L) 3-15
K: <ESC>K External Character Recall Text Flow (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-15
L: <ESC>L Character, Expansion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-15
<ESC>LA Language (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J) 3-15
<ESC>LD User Download (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-15
<ESC>LF Online Feed (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J) 3-15
<ESC>LH Zero Slash (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-15
M: <ESC>M M Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-15
N: <ESC>NC (EJ) Eject and Cut (Applicable Product: I, K, M) 3-15
O: <ESC>OA OA Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-16
<ESC>OB OB Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-16
<ESC>OF Offset Data (Applicable Product: I, M) 3-16
<ESC>OL Online (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-16
P: <ESC>P Character, Pitch (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-16
<ESC>( Reverse Image (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-16
<ESC>PC Printer Motion Register Specification (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-16
<ESC>PD Small Label Size Specification (Applicable Product: H) 3-16
<ESC>% Rotate, Fixed Base Reference Point (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-16
<ESC>PG EEPROM Setup (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-16
<ESC>PH Print Method, Thermal/Themal Transfer (Applicable Product: F, I, K, L, M) 3-16
<ESC>PI PCX File, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M) 3-17
<ESC>PM Print Mode Selection (Applicable Product: F, K, L) 3-17
<ESC>PO Offset Specification (Applicable Product: F, K, L) 3-17
<ESC># Start Position Specification (Applicable Product: I, K, M) 3-17
<ESC>#E Print Darkness (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-17
<ESC>PR Character, Fixed Spacing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-17
<ESC>PS Character, Proportional Spacing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-17
<ESC>PY PCX File, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M) 3-17
Q: <ESC>Q Print Quantity (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, I, J, K, L, M) 3-17
R: <ESC>RC Sheet Unit Cut Quantity (Applicable Product: H) 3-18
<ESC>RD Font, Raster (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-18
<ESC>RE Telegraphic Message End Specification (Applicable Product: H) 3-18
<ESC>RF Recall and Print of Font & Logo (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-18
<ESC>RI Label Size (Applicable Product: H) 3-18
<ESC>RM Mirror Image (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, J, M) 3-19
<ESC>RP Reprint Configuration (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J) 3-19
<ESC>RS Sheet Sending Specification (Applicable Product: H) 3-19
<ESC>RT Label Size (Applicable Product: H) 3-19
<ESC>RW Sheet Unit Copy Quanitity (Applicable Product: H) 3-19
S: <ESC>S S Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-19

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

 <ESC>/ Form Overlay, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-19
<ESC>/D Field, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-19
<ESC>/N Field, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-20
T: <ESC>2D10 PDF417 of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 3-20
<ESC>2D12 Micro PDF417 of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-20
<ESC>2D20 Maxi Code of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-21
<ESC>2D30 QR Code (Mode 2) of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-21
<ESC>2D31 QR Code (Mode 1) of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-21
<ESC>2D32 Micro QR Code of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-22
<ESC>2D50 Data Matrix (ECC200) of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-22
<ESC>T1 Store 16x16 External Character (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-22
<ESC>T2 Store 24x24 External Character (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-22
<ESC>T Custom Designed Characters (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I) 3-23
<ESC>TK Forced Tear off (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-23
<ESC>TP Test Printing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-23
<ESC>TW Option Waiting Time (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-23
<ESC>2S Two-Color Print Range Specification (Applicable Product: F) 3-23
U: <ESC>U U Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-23
<ESC>_D Variable Data Specification (Applicable Product: H) 3-23
<ESC>_F Small Label Start (Applicable Product: H) 3-24
<ESC>_N Format Specification (Applicable Product: H) 3-24
<ESC>_Q Print Quantity (Applicable Product: H) 3-24
V: <ESC>V Vertical Print Position (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, M) 3-24
W: <ESC>WA Calendar Printing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, J, L, M) 3-24
<ESC>WB WB Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-24
<ESC>WD Copy Image Area (Partial Copy) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-24
<ESC>WI IP Address Setup (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-24
<ESC>WK Job Name (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-24
<ESC>WL WL Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-25
<ESC>WM RARP (Applicable Product: F, J, K, L) 3-25
<ESC>WP Calendar Increment (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M) 3-25
<ESC>WS Work-Shift Print Information Specification (Applicable Product: E) 3-25
<ESC>WT Calendar Configuration (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M) 3-25
<ESC>WZ Wireless LAN (Applicable Product: K) 3-25
<ESC>W1 IP Address Setting (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-27
<ESC>W2 Subnet Mask (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-27
<ESC>W3 Default Gateway (Applicable Product: K, L) 3-27
X: <ESC>XB XB Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-27
<ESC>XCL XCL Font (Applicable Font: I, M) 3-28
<ESC>XCS XCS Font (Applicable Font: I, M) 3-28
<ESC>XL XL Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28
<ESC>XM XM Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28
<ESC>XS XS Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28
<ESC>XU XU Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28
Y: <ESC>YE Label Specification (Applicable Product: F, K) 3-28
<ESC>YR Format, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28
<ESC>YS Format, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28
Z: <ESC>Z Stop Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28
<ESC>0 Replace Data (Partial Edit) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 3-28

STANDARD COMMAND CODES

Control Commands 4-2
<ESC>A Start Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-2
<ESC>Z Stop Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-2
<ESC>Q Print Quantity (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, I, J, K, L, M) 4-3
<ESC>ID Job ID Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-4
<ESC>WK Job Name (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-5
Modification Commands 4-6
<ESC>L Character, Expansion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-6
<ESC>P Character, Pitch (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-7
<ESC>PR Character, Fixed Spacing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-8
<ESC>PS Character, Proportional Spacing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-8
<ESC>% Rotate, Fixed Base Reference Point (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-9
<ESC>F Sequential Numbering (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-10
<ESC>FC Print Circles (Applicable Product: M) 4-11
<ESC>FT Print Triangles (Applicable Product: M) 4-13
<ESC>FW Print, Lines & Boxes (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-14

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

 <ESC>( Reverse Image (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-15
<ESC>& Form Overlay, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-16
<ESC>/ Form Overlay, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-17
<ESC>0 Replace Data (Partial Edit) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-18
<ESC>WD Copy Image Area (Partial Copy) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-19
<ESC>J Journal Printing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, K, L) 4-20
<ESC>RF Recall and Print of Font & Logo (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-21
<ESC>RM Mirror Image (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, J, M) 4-22
<ESC>_D Variable Data Specification (Applicable Product: H, K, L) 4-23
<ESC>_F Small Label Start (Applicable Product: H) 4-24
<ESC>_N Format Specification (Applicable Product: H) 4-25
<ESC>_Q Print Quantity (Applicable Product: H, K, L) 4-26
<ESC>PD Small Label Size Specification (Applicable Product: H) 4-27
<ESC>RE Telegraphic Message End Specification (Applicable Product: H) 4-28
<ESC>RS Sheet Sending Specification (Applicable Product: H) 4-29
<ESC>2S Two-Color Print Range Specification (Applicable Product: F) 4-30
Print Position Commands 4-31
<ESC>A1 Media Size (dots) (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-31
<ESC>A1 Media Size (mm) (Applicable Product: I, M) 4-32
<ESC>H Horizontal Print Position (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-33
<ESC>V Vertical Print Position (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-33
<ESC>PO Offset Specification (Applicable Product: F, K, L) 4-34
<ESC># Start Position Specification (Applicable Product: I, K, M) 4-35
<ESC>RI Label Size (Applicable Product: H) 4-36
<ESC>RT Label Size (Applicable Product: H) 4-37
Font Commands 4-38
<ESC>XM XM Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>XS XS Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>XU XU Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>S S Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>M M Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>U U Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>OA OA Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>OB OB Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-38
<ESC>XB XB Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-39
<ESC>XL XL Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-39
<ESC>WB WB Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-39
<ESC>WL WL Font (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-39
<ESC>RD Font, Raster (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-40
<ESC>$ Font, Vector (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-41
<ESC>$= Outline Font Print (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-41
<ESC>XCL XCL Font (Applicable Product: I, M) 4-42
<ESC>XCS XCS Font (Applicable Product: I, M) 4-42
<ESC>K External Character Recall Text Flow (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 4-43
<ESC>T1 Store 16x16 External Character (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-44
<ESC>T2 Store 24x24 External Character (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-45
Barcode Commands 4-46
<ESC>B Barcode, Ratio 1:3 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-46
<ESC>BD Barcode, Ratio 2:5 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-46
<ESC>D Barcode, Ratio 1:2 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-46
<ESC>d/D~ Barcode, Human Readable Information (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 4-50
<ESC>BC CODE 93 Barcode (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-52
<ESC>BF Bookland (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-53
<ESC>BG CODE 128 Barcode (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-54
<ESC>BI UCC/EAN 128 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-55
<ESC>BL UPC-A Barcode (No HRI) (Applicable Product: K, L, M) 4-57
<ESC>BL~d UPC-A Barcode (with HRI) (Applicable Product: I, K, L, M) 4-58
<ESC>BM UPC-A Barcode (with HRI) (Applicable Product: I, K, L, M) 4-60
<ESC>BP Postnet (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-62
<ESC>BT Variable Ratio Barcodes (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-63
<ESC>BW Barcode Expansion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-64
<ESC>EU EAN/UCC Composite Symbol (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-65
2D Code Commands 4-67
<ESC>BK PDF417 (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-67
<ESC>BQ QR Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-68
<ESC>BV Maxi Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-69
<ESC>BX Data Matrix Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-70
<ESC>DC Data Matrix Code, Data (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-71

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

 <ESC>FX Data Matrix Code, Sequential Number (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-72
<ESC>2D10 PDF417 of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-73
<ESC>2D12 Micro PDF417 of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-74
<ESC>2D20 Maxi Code of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-69
<ESC>2D30 QR Code (Mode 2) of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-75
<ESC>2D31 QR Code (Mode 1) of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-76
<ESC>2D32 Micro QR Code of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-78
<ESC>2D50 Data Matrix (ECC200) of 2D Code (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-80
System Commands 4-81
<ESC>CS Print Speed (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-81
<ESC>#E Print Darkness (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-82
<ESC>A3 Base Reference Point (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-83
<ESC>AR Print Area, Standard (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, J) 4-85
<ESC>AX Print Area Enlargement (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, J) 4-85
<ESC>EP Print End Position (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-86
<ESC>~a Cut, Job (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I) 4-87
<ESC>~(NULL) Multiple Cuts (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, M) 4-88
<ESC>~A Cut, Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M) 4-89
<ESC>~B Cut, Last (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H) 4-90
<ESC>CB Tear-off Correction (Applicable Product: L) 4-91
<ESC> CI Sensor Selection (Applicable Product: L) 4-92
<ESC>CR Serial Port (Applicable Product: L) 4-93
<ESC> CP Ribbon (Applicable Product: L) 4-94
<ESC>CT Cut Number Unit (Applicable Product: I, K, L, M) 4-95
<ESC>DI Interface (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-96
<ESC>EJ Media Ejection (Applicable Product: I, M) 4-97
<ESC>EX Memory Area Enlarge Specification (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J) 4-98
<ESC>FM Format Memory Card (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-99
<ESC>FP Print Memory Card Status (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-100
<ESC>@ Offline/Pause (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-101
<ESC>OL Online (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 4-102
<ESC>AO Auto Online (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J) 4-103
<ESC>C Repeat Label (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-104
<ESC>PG EEPROM Setup (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, M) 4-105
<ESC>PC Printer Motion Register Specification (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-105
<ESC>IG Sensor Type Selection (Applicable Product: F, K, L) 4-106
<ESC>I1 IEEE1284 (Applicable Product: L) 4-107
<ESC>I2 Serial Interface (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-108
<ESC>I3 LAN Interface (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-109
<ESC>NC (EJ) Eject and Cut (Applicable Product: K) 4-110
<ESC>PH Print Method, Thermal/Themal Transfer (Applicable Product: F, I, K, L, M) 4-111
<ESC>PM Print Mode Selection (Applicable Product: F, K, L) 4-112
<ESC>E Line Feed (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-113
<ESC>LD User Download (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-114
<ESC>RP Reprint Configuration (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J) 4-115
<ESC>LA Language (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J) 4-116
<ESC>CL CR/LF Deletion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, J) 4-117
<ESC>LH Zero Slash (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J) 4-118
<ESC>LF Online Feed(Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J) 4-119
<ESC>TW Option Waiting Time (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-120
<ESC>TK Forced Tear Off (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-121
<ESC>TP Test Printing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-122
<ESC>EX0 Print Length Expansion (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, J, L) 4-123
<ESC>RC Sheet Unit Cut Quantity (Applicable Product: H) 4-124
<ESC>RW Sheet Unit Copy Quantity (Applicable Product: H) 4-125
<ESC>WI IP Address Setup (Applicable Product: K, l) 4-126
<ESC>WM RARP (Applicable Product: F, J, K, L) 4-127
<ESC>WZ Wireless LAN (Applicable Product: K) 4-127
<ESC>W1 IP Address Setting (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-131
<ESC>W2 Subnet Mask (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-132
<ESC>W3 Default Gateway (Applicable Product: K, L) 4-133
<ESC>WS Work-Shift Information Print Specification (Applicable Product: E) 4-134
<ESC>YE Label Specification (Applicable Product: F) 4-135
Intelligent Commands 4-136
<ESC>I Batch Separator (Applicable Product: I, M) 4-136

Graphic Commands 4-137

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

 <ESC>G Graphics, Custom (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-137
<ESC>GM Graphics, BMP File (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-138
<ESC>GP Graphics, PCX File (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 4-139

OPTIONAL COMMAND CODES

Calendar Commands 5-2
<ESC>WA Calendar Printing (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, J, L, M) 5-2
<ESC>WP Calendar Increment (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, J, L, M) 5-3
<ESC>WT Calendar Configuration (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M) 5-4
Memory Card Commands 5-5
<ESC>CC Card, Slot for Use (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K, L, M) 5-5
<ESC>BJF Card, Format (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, M) 5-6
<ESC>* Memory Card Clear (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-7
<ESC>* System Clear (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J) 5-8
<ESC>BJS Print Memory Card Status (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, M) 5-9
<ESC>BJT True Type Font, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, G, H, I, M) 5-10
<ESC>BJ/BJD True Type Font, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, M) 5-11
<ESC>YR Format/Field, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-12
<ESC>YS Format/Field, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-13
<ESC>&R Form Overlay, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-14
<ESC>&S Form Overlay, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-15
<ESC>GC BMP File, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-17
<ESC>GT BMP File, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-18
<ESC>PY PCX File, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M) 5-19
<ESC>PI PCX File, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, L, M) 5-20
<ESC>GR Custom Graphic, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-21
<ESC>GI Custom Graphic, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-22
<ESC>T Character, Custom Designed (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J) 5-23
<ESC>/D Field, Recall (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-24
<ESC>/N Field, Store (Applicable Product: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, M) 5-25

BI-DIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS
Introduction 6-2
General Configuration 6-2
Serial Interface 6-2
Receive Buffer 6-2
Data Transmission 6-2
Enquire & Response 6-3
Enquire (ENQ) 6-3
Cancel (CAN) 6-3
Print Job 6-3
Print Stop (DLE) 6-3
Print Start (DC1) 6-3
Obtain History Data (LW) 6-4
Release Return Error (SUB) 6-4
Printer Status (MG) 6-4
Counter Status (ME) 6-6
Sensor Status (SG) 6-6
Head Status (HC) 6-7
System Version Information (SB) 6-7
Memory Status (EB) 6-7
Format Overlay Status (FO) 6-8
Font Configuration (FG) 6-8
Interface Status (IG) 6-8
Interface Settings (H2) 6-9
Item Number Check 6-9

APPENDIX
Custom Characters & Graphics 7-2
Custom Designed Character Example 7-2
Custom Graphics Example 7-4
PCX Graphics Example 7-7
Custom Protocol Codes 7-8
Reference Tables 7-9

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

 Table 1: Character Font Set (<ESC>XU) 7-9
Table 2: Character Font Set (<ESC>XS) 7-9
Table 3: Character Font Set (<ESC>XM) 7-10
Table 4: Character Font Set (<ESC>XB) 7-10
Table 5: Character Font Set (<ESC>XL) 7-11
Table 6: Character Font Set (<ESC>OA) 7-11
Table 7: Character Font Set (<ESC>OB) 7-12
Table 8: Parameter A & B Comparison (<ESC>RD) 7-12
Table 9: Character Font Set (<ESC>XCL/XCS) 7-13
Table 10: Character Font Set (<ESC>X70-77) 7-13
Table 11: Barcode Type (<ESC>B) 7-14
Table 12: Barcode Type (<ESC>BD) 7-14
Table 13: Barcode Type (<ESC>D) 7-15
Table 14: Code Table (<ESC>BC) 7-15
Table 15: Code Table (<ESC>BF) 7-16
Table 16: Code128 Data Values (<ESC>BG) 7-16
Table 17: Code Table (<ESC>BI) 7-17
Table 18: Code Table (<ESC>BP) 7-18
Table 19: Code Table (<ESC>BW) 7-18
Table 20: Code Table (<ESC>BW) 7-19
Table 21: Code Table (<ESC>BK) 7-19
Table 22: Character Size (<ESC>BK) 7-20
Table 23: Data Size (<ESC>BQ) 7-21
Table 24: Code Table (<ESC>BQ) 7-22
Table 25: Code Table (<ESC>BQ) 7-22
Table 26: Code Table (<ESC>BQ) 7-23
Table 27: Code Table (<ESC>BV) 7-24
Table 28: Format ID List (<ESC>BX) 7-24
Table 29: Code Table (<ESC>FX) 7-25
Table 30: Symbol & Data Quantity (<ESC>2D12) 7-26
Table 31: Code Table (<ESC>2D12) 7-27
Table 32: Code Table (<ESC>2D20) 7-28
Table 33: Data Size (<ESC>2D30) 7-29
Table 34: Data Size (<ESC>2D31) 7-30
Table 35: Code Table (<ESC>2D32) 7-31
Table 36: Code Table (<ESC>2D32) 7-32
Table 37: Code Table (<ESC>2D32) 7-33
Table 38: Code Table (<ESC>2D50) 7-34
Table 39: Parameters (<ESC>AR/AX) 7-35
Table 40: Parameters (<ESC>PG) 7-36
Table 41: Parameters (<ESC>PG) 7-38
Table 42: Parameters (<ESC>PG) 7-39
Table 43: Parameters (<ESC>PG) 7-40
Table 44: Parameters (<ESC>PC) 7-42
Table 45: Parameters (<ESC>PC) 7-44
Table 46: Parameters (<ESC>PC) 7-45
Table 47: Parameters (<ESC>PC) 7-46
Table 48: Parameters (<ESC>LD) 7-47
Table 49: Parameters (<ESC>EX) 7-47
Table 50: Parameters (<ESC>AR) 7-48
Table 51: Parameters (<ESC>G) 7-48
Table 52: Reference (<ESC>YS) 7-49
Table 53: Parameters (<ESC>&S) 7-50
Table 54: Parameters (<ESC>GI) 7-50
Glossary 7-51

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E

E/Pro Programming Reference PN: 9001096E
 Unit 1: Introduction

INTRODUCTION
• About This Manual
• Print Area Calculation

E/Pro Programming Reference 1-1 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 1: Introduction

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

This manual is laid out consistent with the product discussed and provides all of the information required for printer
programming.
This manual also incorporates the use of special information boxes. Examples of these boxes and the type of
information provided in each, are below.

WARNING: PROVIDES INFORMATION THAT, IF UNHEEDED, MAY RESULT IN

PRESONAL INJURY.

CAUTION: PROVIDES INFORMATION THAT, IF UNHEEDED, MAY

RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

ATTENTION: Provides information that is deemed of special importance but

will not result in personal injusry or product damage if unheeded.

NOTE: Provides helpful hints to assist in performing the tasks at hand.

LCD DISPLAY: Provides the specific display that should be visible on the LCD at that
point.

A comprehensive Table Of Contents provided at the front of this manual facilitates rapid movement within. The
contents identify the different Units, Chapters, and Sections. Each references the page number of their
commencement and all printers applicable to each command identified. Each printer model is identified by an
assigned letter character that may be referenced on the page preceding the Table Of Contents.
The pages of this manual have embedded headers and footers to assist the user in identifying his or her exact
position within the manual. The header provides the unit number followed by its name. The footer identifies the
product on the left, the page number in the center, and the manual’s part number to the right side of the page.
Page enumeration is two-part with each separated by a hyphen. The first character set references the Unit and the
second identifies the page number. Page numbers begin with the numeral (1) one at the commencement of a new
unit and ascend sequentially.

E/Pro Programming Reference 1-2 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 1: Introduction

PRINT AREA CALCULATION

Many print applications may not require labels that fill the entire printable area of the printer. Therefore it is
important to understand how to calculate print size so that the printed image does not exceed the label size.
There are two axis to consider when calculating for print position; horizontal and vertical. The horizontal axis is
lateral positioning parallel with the print head and is measured from the right side of the media to the left. The
vertical axis is the label length from the front to its rear.
This juncture point of the horizontal and vertical axis is referred to as the Base Reference Point (or zero point) and
all measurement is incremental along those axis’ from there. The allowable ranges for these references is
dependent on the particular printer to accommodate different print widths and resolutions.

A1 COMMAND
The A1 command is the preferred method of configuring the printer for media size. If using media smaller than the
print head width, use this command to specify the media size and adjust the start position corresponding to that.
The backing paper must be included in media size considerations. This command would be as follows:
<A1>aaaaabbbb
a = Height of Label
b = Width of Label

NOTE: The valid ranges for each of the above may be found in the product
manuals.

A3 COMMAND
Before beginning to send code, one must perform some simple calculations to determine print positioning. Firstly,
determine the print resolution and maximum print width of the printer. This information is provided in the Technical
Data unit of the Operator Manual and Service Manuals.
The print resolution of the print head has a direct bearing on the “dots per inch” (DPI) of print density. The
corresponding formula for a 203 Resolution print head on a printer with 4.1 Maximum Print Width would be:

Resolution (DPI) x Maximum Printable Width (Linear Inches) =

Maximum Printable Width (Linear Dots)
203 (DPI) x 4.1 (Linear Inches) = 832 (Linear Dots)

Once this is done, one must calculate the label width in linear dots. That formula would be as follows for a 2 inch
wide label:

Resolution (DPI) x Label Width (Linear Inches) =

Label Width (Linear Dots)
203 (DPI) x 2.0 (Linear Inches) = 406 (Linear Dots)

Lastly, one must calculate the horizontal distance to offset printing to accommodate for the difference in size from
the printer’s maximum printable width to the label width. That formula would be as follows using the above
examples:
Maximum Printable Width (Linear Dots) - Label Width (Linear Dots) =
Print Offset (Linear Dots)
832 (Linear Dots) - 406 (Linear Dots) = 426 (Linear Dots)
In the above example, 426 would be the required command entry to reset the initial base reference point (or zero
point) to the new base reference point (or zero point) based on the label’s width.
Note that with each additional horizontal or vertical adjustment, the New Base Reference Point will always be
positioned relative to the last base reference point - not the Initial Base Reference Point. In other words, the only
way to return to the Initial Base Reference Point is to either use commands to reverse the prior commands, or to

E/Pro Programming Reference 1-3 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 1: Introduction

delete all positioning commands to return the printer to its default state.

POWER ON LINE STATUS LABEL RIBBON

LINE FEED

Print Head

LABEL

Label Length
LABEL

Label Width Print Offset

Maximum Printable Width

New Base Reference Point Initial Base Reference Point

Figure 1-1, Print Area Calculation

E/Pro Programming Reference 1-4 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

PROGRAMMING
CONCEPTS
• Programming Language
• Selecting Protocol Codes
• Using Basic
• Print Position Commands

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-1 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE
A programming language for a printer is a familiar concept to most programmers. It is a group of commands that
are designed to use the internal intelligence of the printer. The commands, which are referred to as SATO
Command Codes, contain non-printable ASCII characters (such as <STX>, <ETX>, <ESC>) and printable
characters. These commands must be assembled into an organized block of code to be sent as one data stream to
the printer, which in turn interprets the command codes and generates the desired label output. The programmer is
free to use any programming language available to send the desired data to the printer.
The printer command codes used are based upon “Escape” (1B hexadecimal) sequences. Typically there are four
types of command sequences:

<ESC>{Command}

These commands generally tell the printer to perform a specific action, like “clear the memory.”

<ESC>{Command} {Data}

Commands with this format tell the printer to perform a specific action which is dependent upon the following data,
like “print X labels”, where the value for X is contained in the data.

<ESC>{Command} {Parameter}

These commands set the operational parameters of the printer, like “set the print speed to 3.”

<ESC>{Command} {Parameter} {Data}

Some commands can contain both Parameter and Data elements, such as “print a Code 39 symbol containing the
data.”

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-2 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

SELECTING PROTOCOL CODES

Protocol codes are the special control characters that prepare the printer to receive instructions. For example, the
<ESC> character tells the printer that a command code will follow and the <ENQ> character asks for the printer
status.
There are two pre-defined different sets of Protocol Control codes to choose from. Each set is made up of six
special characters. The Standard Protocol Control codes are non-printable characters, and the Non-Standard
Protocol Control codes are printable characters. The Non-Standard set may be useful on host computers using
protocol converters or in an application where non-printable ASCII characters cannot be sent from the host.

This manual uses the Standard Protocol Control codes for all of the
examples. Alternately, the user may define and download a set of custom
Protocol Control Codes (see Appendix D).

PROTOCOL CODES

CONTROL STANDARD NON-STANDARD

DESCRIPTION
CHARACTER DSW2-7 OFF DSW2-7 ON

STX 02 Hex 7B Hex = { Data start

ETX 03 Hex 7D Hex = } Data end

ESC 1B Hex 5E Hex = ^ Command Code to follow

ENQ 05 Hex 40 Hex = @ Get printer status, Bi-Com Mode

CAN 18 Hex 21 Hex = ! Cancel print job, Bi-Com mode

Off-Line 40 Hex 5D Hex = ] Take printer Off-Line

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-3 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

USING BASIC
It may be useful to test your printer using a BASIC program on a PC or write your actual production programs in
BASIC. Whatever the reason, if working in BASIC, some of the following hints may be helpful.
Set the WIDTH of the output device to 255 characters to avoid automatically sending <CR> and <LF> characters
after every line. The command string should be continuous and uninterrupted by <CR> and/or <LF> commands.
The examples given in this manual are printed on separate lines because they will not fit on a single line and do not
contain <CR> and/or <LF> characters. If these characters are needed, they are explicitly noted by the inclusion of
<CR> and <LF> notations.
If using the printer’s RS232C interface, it is necessary to set the computer COM porton so the CTS and DSR
signals are ignored. Send OPEN “COM” statements as follows:

OPEN “COM1:9600,E,8,1,CS,DS”AS #1

This sets the host computer’s COM1 port RS232C communication parameters for 9600 baud, Even parity, 8 Data
bits, 1 Stop bit and directs the port to ignore the CTS and DSR control signals.
It may be desirable to assign the <ESC> character to a string variable to reduce keystrokes since this character is
often used.
The following two examples use Standard Protocol codes in BASIC.

PRINTING WITH THE PARALLEL PORT

5 REM CL612 Parallel Example Identifies the program as a CL612 parallel port print label.
The “REM” prevents this data from being sent to the
printer and is only displayed on the screen.

10 E$=CHR$(27) Sets the “E$” string as an <ESC> character

20 WIDTH “LPT1”,255 Sets the width of the output to 255 characters

30 LPRINT E$;"A"; Sends an “<ESC>A” command code to the LPT1 parallel

port

40 LPRINT E$;"H400";E$;"V100";E$;"XL1SATO"; Sends the data “SATO” to be to be placed 400 dots

horizontally and 100 dots vertically on the label and printed
in the “XL” font.

50 LPRINT E$;"Q1"; Instructs the printer to print one label.

60 LPRINT E$; “Z”; Tells the printer that the last commandhas been sent. The
printer can nowcreate and print the job.

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-4 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

PRINTING WITH THE RS232C PORT

5 REM CL612 Parallel Example Identifies the program as a CL612e RS232C port print
label. The “REM” prevents this data from being sent to the
printer and displays it only on the screen.

10 E$=CHR$(27) Sets the“E$”string as an <ESC>character.

OPEN “COM1:9600,N,8,1,CS,DS”AS #1 Opens the COM1 port for output and sets the parameters
as 9600 baud, No parity, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit and
instructs the port to ignore the CTS and DSR control
signals.

30 PRINT #1,CHR$ (2); Sends an <STX> (ASCII Code a decimal “2”) to the printer
instructing it to prepare to receive a message.

50 PRINT #1,E$;"A"; Sends an “<ESC>A” command code to Print Port #1

opened by statement 20 above.

60 PRINT#1, E$; "H400"; E$; "V100"; E$; Sends the data “SATO” to be placed 400 dots horizontally
"XL1SATO" and 100 dots vertically on the label and printed in the“XL”
autosmoothed font.

50 PRINT #1, E$;"Q1"; Instructs the printer to print a quantity of one label.

60 PRINT #1, E$; “Z”; Informs the printer that the last command has been sent
and printing can occur.

70 PRINT #1,CHR$ (3); Sends an <ETX> (ASCII Code decimal “3”) informs the
printer of message end.
Identifies the program as a CL612e RS232C port print
label. The “REM” prevents this data from being sent to the
printer and displays it only on the screen.

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-5 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

PRINT POSITION COMMANDS

There are three methods using command codes to properly orient print images on a label. They are as follows:

MEDIA SIZE COMMAND

The Media Size Command (<ESC>A1) allows specification of the label width and length so the printer may
autmatically adjust itself relative to the command entry. However, the label size specified and the actual label size
must match.
EXAMPLE: <ESC>A1aaaaabbbb
a = Label Length
b = Label Width

Label Length
LABEL

Label Width

Figure 2-1, Media Measurement

BASE REFERENCE POINT COMMAND

The Base Reference Point Command (<ESC>A3) establishes the zero point of the Horizontal and Vertical axis so
the distance may be calculated in dots from that point to the label’s edge. This command immediately follows the
Data Start Command.

EXAMPLE: Label Width = total dots - = 406 dots

New Base Ref Point = Max Print Width - Label Width
= (dot quantity) - (406 dots) = 426 dots

Issue Base Reference Point command <ESC>A3 after the data Start command.

<ESC>A<ESC>A3H0426V0001. . . . . .

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-6 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

HORIZONTAL OFFSET COMMAND

Allows print image orientation by combining a part of both methods above by establishing the media size and then
orienting it through base reference point adjustment.

EXAMPLE: A Printer with 8-dpmm:

Label Width = 2" x 25.4 mm/in x 8 dpmm = 406 dots
New Base Reference Point = Maximum Print Width - Label Width
= (832 dots) - (406 dots) = 426 dots

Each <ESC>H command would have the value “426” added to it to correctly position each field.

NOTE: The <ESC>A3 Base Reference Point command can also shift the
reference point in a negative direction (toward the outside edge of the label).

The Command Code subsection contains a sample label output for each command code. These samples reflect
how the printed information would appear on a 4.25 inch wide label.
If you want to test any of the sample label outputs and are using labels less than five inches in width, it is
recommended that the Base Reference Point command be added to the data stream to print the image onto the
label.
The addition of the Base Reference Point command to the data stream will help adjust the print. See the following
two examples or refer to the Base Reference Point command description.

EXAMPLE: <ESC>A
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0100<ESC>L0303<ESC>XMSATO
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0200<ESC>B103100*SATO*
<ESC>H0070<ESC>V0310<ESC>L0101<ESC>XUSATO
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

If using a 2 inch wide label, the entire image may not appear on the label. By adding the following Base Reference
Point command to the second line of the data stream, the base reference point will be changed, causing the image
to shift toward the inside of the printer where it can be printed on the narrower label.

EXAMPLE: M8400RVe data stream results in a 2 inch wide label:

<ESC>A
<ESC>A3H0406V0001
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0100<ESC>L0303<ESC>XMSATO
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0200<ESC>B103100*SATO*
<ESC>H0170<ESC>V0310<ESC>L0101<ESC>XUSATO
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

The image is moved horizontally to the right 2 inches (406 dots) so that itcan be printed on a 2 inch wide label. For
more information, see the Base Reference Point command description.

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-7 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 2: Programming Concepts

E/Pro Programming Reference 2-8 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK
REFERENCE
• A through Z (all commands)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-1 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
A Start Code. Begins all print jobs

~Aaaaa Cut, Label. Specifies the quantity of labels to print between each cut. It is independent of the
Quantity command.

aaaa = Quantity of labels between each cut

~aaaa Cut, Job. Cuts labels at a specified interval in a print job. Quantity of labels printed is equal
to the product of the quantity specified x the value of aaaa.

aaaa = Quantity of labels between each cut (0001 to 9999)

~(NULL) Multiple Cut Specification. Cuts a specified quantity of times for a specified quantity of
labels resulting in one or more labels between each cut sequence.

a = Print quantity until cut (0 to 9999)

~B Cut, Last. Cuts any printed labels that remain in the printer.

AOa Auto Online. Allows the automatic online on power up setting to be enabled or disabled.

a = 0: Powers up in the online mode

1: Powers up in the offline mode

A1aaaabbbb Media Size (dots). Specifies the label size in dots.

aaaa = Label height in dots (0 to Vmax)

bbbb = Label width in dots (0 to Hmax)

A1aabbbccc Media Size (mm). Specifies the label size in millimeters for XL400/410e and TG308e and
TG312e printers.

a = Label Type
0T: Tag Label
0T: Adhesive Label

b = Vertical Dimension in millimeters

025 to 300 Tag (XL400e)
019 to 300 Label (XL400e)
025 to 240 Tag (XL410e)
019 to 240 Label (XL410e)

c = Horizontal Dimension in millimeters

032 to 100 Tag (XL400/410e)
029 to 100 Label (XL400/410e)

& Store Form Overlay. Stores a specified label image in the printer’s volatile form overlay
memory.

AR Normal Print Length. This command resets the printer to the Standard print length (7
inches).

&Raa Form Overlay, Recall. Recalls a label image previously stored in Expanded Memory.

aa = Storage number (00 to 99)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-2 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
&S,aa,bbbb,cccc Form Overlay, Store. Stores a label image in Expanded Memory.

aa = Storage number (00 to 99)

bbbb = Horizontal size of window to be stored (50 to Hmax)

cccc = Vertical size of window to be stored (50 to Vmax)

A(space)Z Form Feed. Feeds a blank tag or label.

*a,bbb Clear Memory Card. Stores a label image in Expanded Memory.

a = Memory section to be cleared.

G: SATO graphics file (001 to 999)
P: PCX graphics file (001 to 999)
F: Stored formats (001 to 999)
O: TrueType fonts, memory card (001 to 009)
R: BMP graphic file (001 to 999)

bbb = BMP graphic file (001 to 999)

*a System Clear. Stores a label image in Expanded Memory for the CT400/410 printers.

a = Clear Item
(blank): Single item receive, edit buffer
T: Foreign character registration area
&: Form overlay
X: All clear

@,nn...n Offline/Pause. Signals the printer to go offline after upon job completion.

nn...n = Optional message to be displayed on the LCD (max 32 characters).

A3H-aaaa-Vbbbb Base Reference Point. Establishes a new base reference point position for the current
label. Units of measurement are dots.

- = Optional character. If included, will shift reference point in negative

direction.

aaaa = Horizontal reference point

bbbb = Vertical reference point

AX Print Area Enlargement. This command sets the printer to the Expanded print length (14
inches). <ESC>EX0 is the recommended replacement.

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-3 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
Babbcccd Bar Codes. Prints a 1:3 ratio barcode.

a = 0: Codabar
1: Code 39
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2/5)
3: UPC-A/EAN-13
4: EAN-8
5: Industrial 2 of 5
6: Matrix 2 of 5
7: reserved
8: reserved
9: reserved
A: MSI
B: reserved
C: Code 93
D: reserved
E: UPC-E
F: Bookland
G: Code 128
H: SSCC/UCC128

bb = Number of dots (01 to 12) for narrow bar and narrow space

ccc = Bar height in dots (001 to 999)

d = SSCC only
0: No human readable text
1: Human readable at top
2: Human readable at bottom

BCaabbbccn...n CODE 93 Barcode. Prints a CODE 93 barcode.

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

b = Height of barcode (001 to 999 dots)

c = Digit quantity of data (01 to 99)

n = Print data

BDabbccc Bar Codes. Prints a 2:5 ratio barcode, except for UPC, EAN, Code 93, Code 128 and SSCC
symbols, which are fixed width bar codes. For values a, bb, ccc and d see instructions for
Babbcccd.

For UPC/EAN bar codes, this command puts descender bars and human readable text
below the symbol.

BFaabbbn...n Bookland. Prints a Bookland barcode.

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

b = Height of barcode (001 to 999 dots)

n = Print data

BGaabbn...n CODE 128. Prints a CODE 128 barcode.

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

b = Height of barcode (001 to 999 dots)

n = Print data

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-4 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
BIaabbbcn...n SSCC. Prints a SSCC barcode.

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

b = Barcode height (001 to 999 dots)

c = Barcode expository font specification

0: Without HRI
1: HRI available in upper part of barcode
2: HRI available in upper part of barcode

n = Barcode print data (17 digits fixed)

BJaa..abb..b True Type Font, Store. Prepares the Expanded Memory to accept True Type font data.
BJDcccccddddee...e
aa...a = 40 byte font description

bb...b = 10 byte date field

ccccc = Memory Offset (hexadecimal)

dddd = Data size in bytes (max = 2000)

ee...e = Font data to be downloaded

BJFaaaaaaaa Card, Format. Initializes the Memory Area and formats it for use. Should be preceded by the
Memory Area Select command for the memory area to be initialized.

aaaa....a = 8 character alphanumeric password

BJS Print Memory Card Status. Reports the status of the currently active Memory Card to the
host by printing a status label.

BJTaabbccddeefffgg..g True Type Font, Recall. Recalls a previously stored bit mapped TrueType font for use.

aa = Font ID (01 to 99)

bb = Horizontal Expansion (01 to 12)

cc = Vertical Expansion (01 to 12)

dd = Reserved, always 00

ee = Character pitch (01 to 99)

ffff = Number of characters

gg...g = Data to be printed using font

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-5 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
BKaabbcddeeefffnn...n PDF417. Prints PDF417 2-D symbols.

aa = Minimum module dimension (03-09 dots). Will not print for values of 01,
02 or greater than 09

bb = Minimum module pitch dimension (04-240 dots). Will not print for values
of 01, 02, 03 or greater than 25

c = Security level (1-8)

dd = Code words per line (01-30). If 00 is specified for dd and ee, printer will
automatically optimize settings

ee = Rows/symbol (00 or 03). If 00 is specified for dd and ee, printer will

automatically optimize settings

fff = Number of characters to be encoded (0001-2700)

g = Not specified, standard PDF417

M: Micro PDF417
T: Truncated PDF417

nn...n = Data to be printed.

BLabbcccn...n UPC-A barcode (No HRI). Specifies UPC-A Barcode with start and end bar in the same
length with guard bar.

a = Barcode type: H: UPC-A (“H” fixed)

b = Narrow bar width: Valid range: 01 to 12 dots

c = Barcode height: CG200 Series: 001 to 999 dots

n = Print data: Data: 11 digits fixed

BL ~d UPC-A barcode (Font designation). Specifies font type of UPC-A (with HRI characters).

a = Barcode type: H: UPC-A (“H” fixed)

b = Narrow bar width: Valid range: 01 to 12 dots

c = Barcode height: CG200 series: 001 to 999 dots

n = Print data: Barcode data: 11 digits fixed

d = Font
XU (CG200 Series only)
XS (CG200 Series only)
XM (CG200 Series only)
XB (CG200 Series only)
XL (CG200 Series only)
OA
OB
U* (CG200 Series only)
S* (CG200 Series only)
M* (CG200 Series only)
WB* (CG200 Series only)
WL* (CG200 Series only)
n = Print data: Interpretation data: 12 digits fixed

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-6 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
BMabbcccn...n UPC-A barcode (with HRI). Specifies UPC-A barcode with HRI characteristics. The start
and end bar height will be the same length as that of guard bars.

a = Barcode type = H: UPC-A (“H” fixed)

b = Narrow bar width = Valid range: 01 to 12 dots

c = Barcode height
CG200 series: 001 to 999 dots

n = Print data: Data: 11 digits fixed

BPn...n Postnet. Prints Postnet bar codes.

n...n = 5 digit ZIP (Postnet-32 format)

6 digits (Postnet-37 format)
9 digit ZIP+4 (Postnet -52 format)
11 digit ZIP+4+DPC (Postnet-62, Delivery Point format)

BQ QR Code. Prints QR CODE of 2D code.

a = Error correction level

1: 7% high density
2: 15% standard
3: 30% high reliability
4: 25%

b = Concatenation mode
0: Normal Mode
1: Concatenation mode

c = Size of one side of cell (01 to 32)

d = Quantity of partitions by concatenation mode (01 to 16)

e = Sequential number partitioned by concatenation (01 to 16)

f = Concatenation mode parity data (00 to FF)

g = Character mode
1: Number Mode
2: Alphanumeric Mode
3: Binary Mode

h = Quantity of data (0001 to 7366)

n = Print data.

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-7 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
BTabbccddee Bar Codes. Variable Ratio. provides the ability to print a bar code with a ratio other than
those specified through the standard bar code commands (B, BD, and D).

a = Bar code option:

0: Codabar
1: Code 39
2: Interleaved 2 of 5
5: Industrial 2 of 5
6: Matrix 2 of 5

bb = Narrow space in dots (01-99)

cc = Wide space in dots (01-99)

dd = Narrow bar in dots (01-99)

ee = Wide bar in dots (01-99)

BVa,b,c, ddddddddd,eee, Maxicode. Prints 2-D Maxicode symbols per AIM I.S.S. specification.
f f f,gg..g
a = Position of symbol within the set

b = Total number of symbols in the set

c = Mode

dd..d = 9 digit numeric Postal Code

eee = 3 digit numeric Country Code

fff = 3 digit numeric Service Class

gg..g = Data, terminated by <ESC>

BWaabbb Bar Codes. Expansion. Works together with the BT command to specify an expansion factor
and the bar code height for the particular symbol being printed.

aa = Expansion factor by which the width of all bars and spaces is increased
(01 to 12)

bbb = Bar height by dot (004 to 999 dots)

BXaabbccddeeefffghh Data Matrix. Data Format. Specifies the format of the Data Matrix 2-D symbology.

aa = Format ID (01 to 06, If ECC200 is selected (bb=20) this field is ignored

bb = Error correction level (00, 05, 08,10,14, 20 or 200. All other values
processed as 00

cc = Horizontal cell size (03 to 12 dots/cell)

dd = Vertical cell size (03 to 12 dots per cell)

eee = Cells per line. Use 000 for optimized symbol

fff = Cell lines. Use 000 to optimize

g = Mirror image
0: Normal Print
1: Reverse Print

hh = Guide cell thickness (01 to 15) 01 indicates normal type

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-8 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
C Repeat Label. Prints a duplicate of the last label printed.

CBabb Tear-off correction. Corrects tear-off value.

a = Increment or decrement:
+: Increment
-: Decrement

bb = Distance to move (mm): -5 to 98

CIa Sensor selection. Makes minor adjustments of darkness for the best print quality.

a = Sensor type:
0: Sensor is not used.
1: I-mark (CX-compatible)
2: Transmissive

CCa Card, Slot for Use. Selects the memory area for all following expanded memory commands.

a = Memory Area 1

b = Memory Area 2

CLa CR/LF Deletion. Deletes the occurrence of CR/LF characters in the data stream.

a = 0: Do not delete CR/LF

1: Delete CR/LF

CRaaaaabcd Serial port. Sets serial port.

aaaaa = BAUD rate:

9600: 9600 bps
19200: 19200 bps
38400: 38400 bps

b = Parity:
N: Non parity
O: Odd number
E: Even number

c = Data bit:
7: 7 bit
8: 8 bit

d = Stop bit
1: 1 bit
2: 2 bit

CPa Ribbon. Selects the use or disuse of ribbon.

a = Ribbon type:
0: Direct thermal (ribbon is not required)
1: Thermal transfer (ribbon is required)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-9 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
CSa Print Speed Selection. Specifies a unique print speed in in./sec. through software for a
particular label.

a = Speed Range

CTa Cut number unit. Cuts label at a specified interval in a print job.

a = Number of labels between each cut: Quantity range: 0 to 9999.

Dabbcccn Barcode, Ratio 1:2. Prints a 1:3 ratio barcode.

a = Barcode Type
0: NW-7
1: CODE39
2: Interleaved 2 of 5
3: JAN/EAN-13 (fixed ratio)
4: JAN/EAN-8 (fixed ratio)
5: Industrial 2 of 5
6: Matrix 2 of 5
H: UPC-A (fixed ratio)

b = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

c = Barcode height (001 to 999 dots)

n = Barcode print data

dn...n Barcode, Human Readable Information (HRI). Specifies the character type of human
readable information of barcode. Used in conjunction with the preceding <ESC>D.

d = Character type specification

XU
XS
XM
XB
XL
OA
OB
HRI data

n = HRI print data

DCxx...x Data Matrix. Print Data. Prints data using Data Matrix format specified in BX Data Format
command.

xx...x = Data to be printed. Cannot exceed 500 characters.

DIa Interface. Specifies the interface used to connect with a host.

a = Interface
0: USB/Wireless LAN
1: RS-232C or LAN
2: Keypad

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-10 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
$a,bbb,ccc,d Font, Vector. Specifies printing of the unique SATO vector font.

a = A: Helvetica Bold (proportional spacing)

B: Helvetica Bold (fixed spacing)

b = Font width (50 to 999 dots)

c = Font height (50 to 999 dots)

d = Font variation (0 to 9) as follows:

0: Standard
1: Standard open (outlined)
2: Gray (mesh) pattern 1
3: Gray (mesh) pattern 2
4: Gray (mesh) pattern 3
5: Standard, shadow 1
6: Standard, shadow 2
7: Standard mirror image
8: Italic
9: Italic open (outlined)

$=n Outline Font Print. Specifies the print of outline font.

n = Print data

Eaaa Line Feed. Provides the ability to print multiple lines of the same character size without
specifying a new print position for each line.

aaa = Number of dots (1 to 999) between the bottom of the characters on one
line to the top of the characters on the next line.

EJ Media Ejection. Enables forward and backward motion for cutting and printing.

EP Print End Position. Specifies the label stop position in the sensor valid mode.

EU EAN/UCC Composite. Specifies the composite symbol of EAN/UCC.

a = 1D barcode symbology
01: RSS-14 (13 digits for 1D data)
02: RSS-14 Truncated (13 digits for 1D data)
03: RSS-14 Stacked (13 digits for 1D data)
04: RSS-14 Stacked Omni-directional (13 digits for 1D data)
05: RSS Limited (13 digits for 1D data)
07: UPC-A (11 digits for 1D data)
08: UPC-E (10 digits fixed for 1D data)
09: EAN13 (12 digits for 1D data)
10: EAN8 (7 digits for 1D data)

b = Minimum bar width (01 to 12 dots)

n = Data (Sum of 1D and 2D codes up to 120 digits)

EX Memory Area Enlarge Specification. Specifies the enlargement of the print area in the
vertical direction.

a = 0: Internal memory slot number specification

EX0 Expanded Print Length. Expands the print length to 9999 dots.

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-11 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
Faaaabcccc ddee Sequential Numbering. Allows the printing of sequencing fields (text, bar codes) where all
incrementing is done within the printer.

aaaa = Number of times to repeat the same data (0001 to 9999)

b = Plus or minus symbol (+ for increments; - for decrements)

cccc = Value of step for sequence (001 to 9999)

dd = Quantity of digits for sequential numbering (01 to 99)

ee = Quantity of digits free for sequential numbering (01 to 99)

FCaaabbbcd Print circles. Specifies the printing of circles.

a = Radius (5 to 999 dots)

b = Line width (1 to 999 dots)

c = Section number (0 to 8: Omissible)

d = Pattern (0 to 3: Omissible)

0: Solid black line

1: Gray 1

2: Gray 2

3: Gray 3

FTaaaabbbbccccd Print triangles. Specifies the printing of triangles.

a = Side length (10 to 2000 dots)

b = Line width (1 to 1000 dots)

c = Base length (10 to 2000 dots) Omissible.

d = Pattern (0 to 3) Omissible.

0: Solid black line

1: Gray 1

2: Gray 2

3: Gray 3

FMa Format memory card. Specifies the format (initialization) of memory card.

a = User ID: Up to 8 bytes in alphanumeric and symbols.

FP Print memory card status. Prints the status of memory card.

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-12 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
FWaabcccc Line. Prints a line. Units of measurement are dots.

aa = Line width

b = V: Vertical line
H: Horizontal line

cccc = Vertical line length

dddd = Horizontal line length

FXaaabcccdddeee Data Matrix. Sequential Numbering. Prints sequential numbered Data Matrix 2-D symbols.

aaa = Number of duplicate labels (001 to 999)

b = Increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement

ccc = Increment/decrement steps (001 to 999)

ddd = Sequential numbering start position (001 to 999) from left side

eee = Incremented data length (001 to 999). Measured from start position

Gabbbccc(data) Custom Graphics. Allows the creation and printing of graphic images using a dot-
addressable matrix.

a = Specifies format of data stream to follow

B: Binary
H: Hexadecimal

bbb = Number of horizontal 8 x 8 blocks

ccc = Number of vertical 8 x 8 blocks

data = Data to describe the graphic image

GCaaa BMP File, Recall. Recalls BMP graphic files stored in Expanded Memory.

GIabbbcccdddee...e Graphic, Store. Stores a graphic image in the memory card to be called later for printing on
a label.

a = Specifies format of data stream to follow

B: Binary
H: Hexadecimal

bbb = Number of horizontal 8 x 8 blocks

ccc = Number of vertical 8 x 8 blocks

ddd = Graphics storage number (001 to 999)

ee...e = Data to describe the graphic image

GMaaaaa BMP File. Downloads BMP file to the internal graphics image memory.

aaaaa = Quantity of bytes to download (max DOS file size is 32K)

GPaaaaa PCX File. Downloads PCX file to the internal graphics image memory.

aaaaa = Quantity of bytes to download (max DOS file size is 32K)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-13 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
GRccc Graphic, Recall. Recalls for printing the graphic image stored by the GI command.

ccc = Storage number (001 to 999)

GTaaa,bbbbb, nn. . . n BMP File, Store. Stores BMP files in Expanded Memory.

aaa = Storage area number (001 to 999)

bbbbb = Size of BMP file in bytes

nn....n = Data

Haaaa Horizontal Position. Specifies a field’s horizontal location across the width of the label from
the current base reference point. The units of measurement are dots.

I Batch Separator. To issue a tag with a special marking so that it can easily be divided on the
stacker. Is applicable only to the XL400/410e printers.

a = Batch separator type

1: Divided mark method
2: Separator method
I2abcde Serial interface. Specifies serial interface.

a Baud rate = 0: 9600 BPS

= 1: 19200 BPS

= 2: 38400 BPS

= 3: 57600 BPS

b Data bit = 0: 8 bit

= 1: 7 bit

c Parity = 0 = No parity
1 = Odd
2 = Even

d Stop bit = 0 = 1bit

1 = 2bit

e Control = 0 = READY/BUSY control (Single item buffer)

1 = READY/BUSY control (Multi item buffer)
2 = XON/XOFF
3 = Driver protocol
4 = Status 3

I3a LAN Interface. Specifies LAN interface.

a = 0: 2 port connection, or unsolicited (for driver protocol)

= 1: 2 port connection or solicited by ENQ (for driver protocol)

= 2: 1 port connection or solicited by ENQ (STATUS3)

IDaa Job ID Store. Stores the Job ID number.

aa = Job ID number assigned (01 to 99)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-14 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
IGa Sensor Type Selection. Selects the sensor type.

a = 0: Reflective (Eye-Mark) sensor

1: Transmissive (See-Thru) sensor
2: Sensor not used

I1abbb IEEE1284. Specifies the receive mode and ACK width of IEEE1284.

a = Receive mode (Default: 0):

0: Multi item buffer
1: Single item buffer

b = ACK width: Valid range: 010 to 200 (1-50ns)

J Journal Print. Provides the ability to print text line by line. Fixed spacing between lines and
characters.

Kab90cc Custom Designed Characters, Recall. Recalls for printing a custom character stored by
the Tabcc(data) command.

a = 1: 16 x 16 matrix
2: 24 x 24 matrix

b = Indicates the format that data stream was stored

B: Binary
H: Hexadecimal

cc = Memory location where the character was stored. Valid locations are 21
to 52 or “!” to “R” in hex values.

Laabb Character, Expansion. Expands characters in both directions.

aa = Multiple to expand horizontally (01 to 12)

bb = Multiple to expand vertically (01 to 12)

LAa Language. Specifies the display language for the LCD.

a = 0: English
1: French
2: German
3: Spanish
4: Italian
5: Portuguese

LDa,b,c,d,e,f,g,i,jj User Download. Downloads a user defined set of Alternate Protocol Command Codes.

LFa Online Feed. To enable or disable online label feed.

a = 0: Enables label feed when online

1: Disables label feed when online

LHa Zero Slash. Allows printing zeroes with or without a slash.

a = 0: Prints zeroes without a slash

1: Prints zeroes with a slash

M Font type. Specifies the 13W x 20H dot matrix font (includes descenders).

NC (EJ) Eject and Cut. Cuts any printed labels that remain in the printer.

OA Font type. Specifies the OCR-A font.

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-15 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
OB Font type. Specifies the OCR-B font dot matrix.

OL Online. Changes the printer status from offline to online.

Paa Character Pitch. Designates the number of dots between characters.

aa = Number of dots between characters (01 to 99)

(aaaa,bbbb Reverse Image. Reverse image from black to white and vice versa. The units of measure
are dots.

aaaa = Horizontal length in dots of area to be reversed.

bbbb = Vertical height in dots of area to be reversed.

PCaa,bbPCF,a,........z Flash ROM Setup. Sets the default printer configuration in Flash ROM.

a = Item number setting (F = setting of all items)

b-z = Sets content
Appendix Reference Table XXXX for CT400/410 printer
Appendix Reference Table XXXX for all other printers
PD Small Label Size Specification. Specifies parameters relative to small label size. Only
applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Vertical dimension (480 to 3600 dots)

b = Horizontal dimension (480 to 1600 dots)
c = Label size (00 to 99 dots)
d = Multiple cut labels (01 to 99)
%a Rotate, Fixed Base Reference Point.

a = 0: Sets print to normal direction

1: Sets print to 90 degrees counter-clockwise
2: Sets print to 180 degrees rotated (upside down)
3: Sets print to 270 degrees counter-clockwise (90x CW)

PG EEPROM Setup. Sets the default printer configuration in EEPROM.

a-z = Sets content

Appendix Reference Table 43 for CT400/410 printer
Appendix Reference Table 42 for XL408/410e printers
Appendix Reference Table 41 for M10e printer
Appendix Reference Table 40 for all other printers
PHa Print Method, Thermal/Thermal Transfer. Selects the thermal printing method.

a = 0: Thermal transfer printing

1: Direct thermal printing

PIaaa,bbbbb,cc...c PCX File, Store. Stores a PCX graphic file.

aaa = Storage number (001 to 999)

bbbbb = Number of bytes in the file to be stored

cc...c =

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-16 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
PMa Print Mode Selection. Selects desired backfeed operation.

a = 0: No backfeed, continuous operation

1: Tear-Off
2: Cut, backfeed after print
3: Cut, backfeed before print
4: Cut, no backfeed
7: Dispense, backfeed after print
8: Dispense, backfeed before print

POabcc Offset Specification. Specifies label stop position. Only applicable to the CT400/410
printers.

a = Offset specification
0: Cutter motion
1: Dispenser motion
2: Tear-Off motion
3: Continuous motion

b = Offset direction
+: Forward
-: Backward

c = Offset Distance (00 to 99 dots)

# Start Position Specification. Specifies the vertical print start position. Only applicable to the
XL400/410e printers.

a = Shift direction
+: Forward
-: Backward

b = Shift distance
XL400e: 000 to 400 dots
XL410e: 000 to 600 dots

#Ea Print Darkness. Specifies a new print darkness setting.

PR Fixed Font Spacing. Returns the printer to fixed character spacing mode.

PS Proportional Font Spacing. Places the printer in the proportional character spacing mode.
Will not work with U Font.

PYaaa PCX File, Recall. Recalls a PCX graphics file.

aaa = The storage number assigned to the file (001 to 999)

Qaaaaaa Print Quantity. Specifies the total number of labels to print.

aaaaaa = Total quantity of labels to print for the job (000001-999999)

RC Sheet Unit Cut Quantity Specification. Specifies the sheet cut quantity for small labels.
Only applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Number (01 to 99)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-17 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
RDabb,ccc,ddd,nn...n Font Type. Specifies the internal AGFA raster fonts.

a = F: Specifies Futura font

P: Specifies CG Palcio font
S: CG Century Schoolbook font
G: CG Triumvirate Condensed font
V: CG Univers font
t: CG Times font

bb = 0: No character set
1: ISO 8859/1 Latin1
2: ISO 8859/2 Latin2
3: ISO 8859/9 Latin5
4: CP-737 DOSGreek
5: CP-885 DOS Cyrillic
6: CP-864 DOSArabic
8: PC-850 Multilingual

ccc = Horizontal Size (16 to 999 dots or P08 to P72 point size)

ddd = Vertical Size (16 to 999 dots or P08 to P72 point size)

nn..n = Data to be printed

REa Telegraphic Message End Specification. Specifies the telegraphic message end relative to
small labels. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Operates when ending

0: Discharge motion
1: Discharge motion + Cut motion

RFabn...n Recall and Print of Font & Logo. Calls and prints font and logo downloaded with Label
Gallery’s “GalleryMemMaster”.

a = Font ID number (01 to 99)

b = Print digit (1 to 9999)

n = Print data

RI Label Size Specification. Specifies label dimensions. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Sheet width (1500 to 3200 dots)

b = Sheet length (480 to 3600 dots)
c = Label width (0 to 60 dots)
d = Label length (00 to 60 dots)
e = Small label width (480 to 3200 dots)
f = Small label length (480 to 3600 dots)
g = Label width quantity (01 to 06)
h = Label length quantity (01 to 07)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-18 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
RMhvab Mirror Rotate. Prints mirror image of print data.

h = Horizontal position start

1 to 0832 dots (CL408e / M8400RVe / M84Pro-2)
1 to 1248 dots (CL412e / M84Pro-3)
1 to 1216 dots (CL608e / M8460Se)
1 to 1984 dots (CL612e)
1 to 0896 dots (M5900RVe / M8459Se)
1 to 3200 dots (M10e)
1 to 1024 dots (M8485Se)
1 to 1344 dots (M8490Se)
1 to 2496 dots (M84Pro-6)
v = Vertical position start
1 to 1424 dots (CL408e / M8400RVe / M84Pro-2)
1 to 2136 dots (CL412e / M84Pro-3)
1 to 1424 dots (CL608e / M8460Se)
1 to 2136 dots (CL612e)
1 to 1424 dots (M5900RVe / M8459Se)
1 to 3600 dots (M10e)
1 to 1424 dots (M8485Se)
1 to 2136 dots (M8490Se)
1 to 4272 dots (M84Pro-6)
a = Horizontal range (8 to 9999)
b = Vertical range (8 to 9999)
RPa Reprint Configuration. Specifies the setting of reprint.

a = Reprint setting
0: Normal (no reprint setting)
1: Reprint setting

RS Send Sheet Specification. Specifies paper delivery (feed operation) of marked unit (Eye-
mark, Gap) for small label. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

RTa Print Order Specification. Specifies the order or arrangement of small labels. Only
applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Print direction
0: Horizontal
1: Vertical

RWa Sheet Copy Quantity Specification. Specifies the quantity of copies of each sheet of small
labels. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Quantity (01 to 99)

S Font type. Specifies the 8W x 15H dot matrix font (includes descenders).

/ Form Overlay, Recall. Recalls the label image from the printer’s form overlay memory for
printing.

/Dbbc...c Field, Recall. To recall a field previously stored in the memory card.

bb = Quantity of fields to be recalled (01 to 99)

cc...c = Data to be placed in field

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-19 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
/Nbb,cc Field, Store. To store a field in the memory card.

bb = Field number (01 to 99)

cc = Quantity of characters in the field

2D10 2D Code. Specifies PDF417 of 2D code.

a = Minimum module width (01 to 09 dots)

b = Minimum module height (01 to 24 dots)
c = Security level (0 to 8)
d = Quantity of data code words per line (01 to 30)
00: Automatic (width varies on data quantity specified)

e = Quantity of lines per symbol (03 to 90)

00: Automatic (width varies on data quantity specified)

f = Code type
0: Normal (if digit is omitted, the default is zero)
1: Truncated scale

m = Data size (1 to 2681 bytes)

n = Print data
2D12 2D Code. Specifies Micro PDF417 of 2D code.

a = Minimum module width (01 to 09 dots)

b = Minimum module height (01 to 24 dots)
c = Quantity of data code words per line (1 to 4 columns)
d = Quantity of lines per symbol (4 to 44 lines)
e = Binary mode
0: Normal (if digit is omitted, the default is zero)
1: Binary

m = Data size (0001 to 0366 bytes)

n = Print data

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-20 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
2D20 2D Code. Specifies Maxi Code of 2D code.

a = Mode
2: Delivery only (numeric)
3: Delivery only (Alphanumeric)
4: Standard symbol
6: Reader only

b = Service class (001 to 999 numeric)

c = Country code (001 to 999 numeric)
d = Postal code
Mode 2 (0 to 999999999)
Mode 3 (000000 to 999999)

m = Data size (1 to 138 bytes)

n = Print data
2D30/2D31 2D Code. Specifies QR Code (Model 1 or Model 2) of 2D code.

a = Error correction level

L: 7%
M: 15%
Q: 25%
H: 30%

b = Cell size (01 to 32 dots)

c = Data setting mode
0: Manual
1: Automatic

d = Concentration mode
0: Normal
1: Concentration

e = Quantity of partitions by concentration mode (01 to 16)

f = Sequential number partitioned by concentration mode (01 to 16)
g = Concentration mode parity data (00 to FF)
k = Character mode
1: Numeric mode
2: Alphanumeric mode
3: Kanji mode

m = Data size
2D30: Model 2 (1 to 2953 bytes)
2D31: Model 1 (1 to 486 bytes)

n = Print data

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-21 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
2D32 2D Code. Specifies QR Code (Micro QR Code) of 2D code.

a = Error correction level

L: 7%
M: 15%
Q: 25%

b = Cell size (01 to 32 dots)

c = Data setting mode
0: Manual
1: Automatic

k = Character mode
1: Numeric mode
2: Alphanumeric mode
3: Kanji mode

m = Data size (1 to 15 bytes, set when selecting binary)

n = Print data
2D50 2D Code. Specifies Data Matrix (ECC200) of 2D code.

a = Cell width (01 to 16 dots)

b = Cell height (01 to 16 dots)
c = Quantity of cells per line (000 fixed)
d = Quantity of lines (000 fixed)
m = Data size (1 to 3116 bytes, set when selecting binary)
n = Print data
Specify 7EH, 00H when printing 00H
Specify 7EH, 7EH when printing 7EH

T1 Register external character of 16x16 dots in memory card.

a = [Data type] =
H: Hex character
B: Binary code

b = [Registration font code address] =

<JIS>
H: “21” to “7F” Up to 95 registries
B: 21H to 7FH Up to 95 registries
<Shift JIS>
H: “40” to “9E” Up to 95 registries
B: 40H to 9EH Up to 95 registries

n = [External character data]

T2 Register external character of 24x24 dots in memory card.

a = [Data type] =
H: Hex character
B: Binary code

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-22 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
b = [Registration font code address] =
<JIS>
H: “21” to “7F” Up to 95 registries
B: 21H to 7FH Up to 95 registries
<Shift JIS>
H: “40” to “9E” Up to 95 registries
B: 40H to 9EH Up to 95 registries

n = [External character data]

Tabcc(data) Store Custom Designed Characters. To create and store custom characters or images in
the printer’s volatile memory. See Kab90cc to recall the character for printing.

a = 1: 16 x 16 matrix
2: 24 x 24 matrix

b = Specifies data stream format to follow

B: Binary
H: Hexadecimal

cc = Memory location to store the character. Valid locations are 21 to 52 or “!”

to “R” in hex values

(data) = Data to describe the character

TK Forced tear off. Executes Tear off compulsory.

TPa Test Print. Allows test labels to be printed via host command.

a = 0: Small user test print

1: Large user test print
2: Small factory test print
3: Large factory test print

TWaaa Option waiting time. Specifies waiting time for options.

aaa = Waiting time:

Valid range: 005 to 200 (unit: 100ms)

2S Two-Color Print Range Specification. Specifies a two-color print range. Only applicable to
the CT400/410 printers.

a = Head lock
0: Left side
1: Right side
2: Both sides

b = Start vertical position (specify label vertical size in dots

c = End vertical position (specify label vertical size in dots

U Font type. Specifies a 5W x 9L dot matrix font (includes descenders).

_Daan...n Variable Data Specification. Specifies variable data for small labels. Only applicable to the
M10e printer.

a = Field number (01 to 99)

n = Variable data

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-23 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
_F Smart Label Start Specification. To show the start of small label print specification. Only
applicable to the M10e printer.

_Nab Format Specification. Specifies small label format. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Field number (01 to 99)

b = Data digit (01 to 99)
_Qab Label Print Number Specification. Specifies the print number for small labels. Only
applicable to the M10e printer.

a = Print number (0001 to 9999)

b = 0: Auto new line
1-9: Quantity of blank labels
Vbbbb Vertical Position. Specifies a field’s vertical location down the length of the label from the
current base reference point. Units of measurement are dots.

WA (elements) Calendar Print. Prints the date and/or time field (up to 16 characters) from the printer’s
internal clock. Use slash to separate date elements and colon to separate time elements.
The calendar feature is a purchase option and will only be applicable to those printers so
ordered.

Elements = YY: 2 digit Year (00 to 99)

YYYY: 4 digit Year (1981 to 2080)
MM: Month (01 to 12)
DD: Day (01 to 31)
HH: 12 Hour (00 to 11)
hh: 24 Hour Clock (00 to 23)
mm: Minutes (00 to 59)
ss: Seconds (00 to 59)
TT: AM or PM
JJJ: Julian Date (000 to 366)
WW: Week (00 to 53)
ww: Week (01 to 54)

WBa Font Type. Specifies the 18W x 30L dot matrix font (includes descenders).

a = 0: Disables auto-smoothing of font

1: Enables auto-smoothing if expansion is greater than 3

WDHaaaaVbbbbXccccYddd Copy Image Area (Partial Copy). To copy an image to another location of the label.
d
aaaa = Horizontal position of the top left corner of image area

bbbb = Vertical position of the top left corner of image area

cccc = Horizontal length of image area

dddd = Vertical length of image area

WIa IP Address setup. Specifies IP address setup method.

a = 0: Manual setup
1: DHCP

WKnn...n Job Name. Stores the job name.

nn..n = Job name, up to 16 ASCII characters

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-24 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
WLa Font type. Specifies the 28W x 52L dot matrix font (including descenders).

a = 0: Disables auto-smoothing of font

1: Enables auto-smoothing if expansion is greater than 3

WMa RARP. Specifies if RARP is disabled or enabled. When enabled, RARP will automatically
obtain IP address in start up.

a = 0: Disabled
1: Enabled

WPabbb Calendar Increment. To add a value to the printer’s current date and/or time. Does not
change the printer’s internal time setting. The calendar feature is a purchase option and will
only be applicable to those printers so ordered.

a = Y: Years
M: Months
D: Days
h: Hours

bbb = Numeric data: Week (00-99), Years (1-9), Months (01-99), Days (001-
999), Hours (001-999).

WSa Print Work Shift Information. Specifies the printing of work shift information (shift name,
start time, etc). Only applicable to the M8459/60/85/90Se printers.

a = Print content
1: Shift code
2: Printer use start time
3: Shift name

WTaabbccddee Calendar Set. To set the time and date of the printer’s internal clock.

aa = Year (00-99)

bb = Month (01-12)

cc = Day (01-31)

dd = Hour (00-23)

ee = Minute (00-59)

WZa,b,c,dddddddddddd,eee Wireless LAN. Sets up wireless LAN.

eeeeeeeee,ffffffffffff,gggg,hh
h,iii,j,k, . . . . .zzzzzzzz

Format 1 To set up all items

a = Item number:
F: All items
D: Default settings

b...z = Set value (as shown in the rows below)

Format 2 To set up specific items

a Item number: Valid range: 1-25

b Set value (as shown in the rows below)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-25 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
b = DHCP/BOOTP
0: Disabled
1: Use DHCP/BOOTP

c = RARP
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

d = IP address
000000000000 - 255255255255

e = Subnet mask:
000000000000 - 255255255255

f = Default gateway
000000000000 - 255255255255

g = Socket connection timeout

0000 - 3600

h = FTP timeout
030 - 500

i = LPD timeout
030 - 500

j = Wireless LAN mode

0: Infrastructure mode
1: Ad-hoc mode

k = SSID
1 - 32 character+s (*1)

l = Channel
01 - 11 (CG200 series)

m = Security type
0 None
1 WEP
2 WPA
3 WPA2
4 Dynamic WEP

n = Wireless LAN authentication

0 Open system
1 Shared key

o = WEP key 1
A+5 or 13 characters (ASCII) (*1)
B+10 or 26 digits (HEX) (*2)

p = WEP key 2
A+5 or 13 characters (ASCII) (*1)
B+10 or 26 digits (HEX) (*2)

q = WEP key 3
A+5 or 13 characters (ASCII) (*1)
B+10 or 26 digits (HEX) (*2)

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-26 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
r = WEP key 4
A+5 or 13 characters (ASCII) (*1)
B+10 or 26 digits (HEX) (*2)

s = WEP key index

1-4

t = Authentication
(WPA/WPA2)
0 WPA-PSK
1 EAP

u = Encryption
(WPA/WPA2)
0 TKIP
1 AES

v = Pre-Shared key
8 - 63 characters (*1)

w = EAP authentication
0 None
1 Reserved
2 EAP-TLS
3 EAP-PEAP
4 Reserved
5 EAP-LEAP
6 EAP-TTLS

x = User name
1 - 63 characters (*1)

y = Password
0 - 32 characters (*1)

z = Password for private key

0 - 32 characters (*1)

W1a~a IP Address Setting

a~a = IP address: 12 digits fixed

W2a~a Subnet Mask. Specifies Subnet Mask.

a~a = Subnet mask: 12 digits fixed

W3a~a Default Gateway. Specifies Default Gateway.

a~a = Default gateway: 12 digits fixed

XBa Font Type. Specifies 48W x 48L dot matrix font (includes descenders).

a = 0: Disables auto-smoothing of font

1: Enables auto-smoothing if expansion is greater than 3

n = Print data

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-27 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 3: Code Quick Reference

COMMAND QUICK REFERENCE

INSTRUCTION DESCRIPTION
XCL Font Type. Specifies 48W x 36L dot matrix font (includes descenders). Only applicable to
the XL400/410e printers.

XCS Font Type. Specifies 32W x 24L dot matrix font (includes descenders). Only applicable to
the XL400/410e printers.

XLan...n Font Type. Specifies the 48W x 48H dot matrix font (includes descenders).

a = Smoothing specification
0: Smoothing disabled
1: Smoothing enabled

n = Print data

XM Font type. Specifies the 24W x 24H dot matrix font (includes descenders).

XS Font type. Specifies the 17W x 17H dot matrix font (includes descenders). Only applicable to
the XL400/410e printers.

XU Font type. Specifies the 5W x 9L dot matrix font (includes descenders).

YEa Label Specification. Temporarily specifies label specification. Only applicable to the CT400/
410 printers.

a = Label type
0: Adhesive label
1: Tag

YR,aaa/D,bb,cc...c Recall Format/Field. To recall a field from a format previously stored in the memory card.

aaa = Number of format to be recalled (001 to 999)

bb = Number of field to be recalled (01-99)

cc...c = Data to be placed in field

YS,aaa/Nbb,cc Store Format/Field. To store a field in a format in the memory card.

aaa = Format number (001 -999)

bb = Field number (01-99)

cc = Number of characters in the field

Z Stop Code. Ends all print jobs.

0 (zero) Replace Data (Partial Edit). Provides the ability to replace a specified area of the previous
label with new data.

(*1) Alphanumeric or symbols. Except for [,] (comma) or ["] (double quotation)
(*2) ‘0’ to ‘9’, ‘A’ to ‘F’

E/Pro Programming Reference 3-28 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

STANDARD
COMMAND CODES
• Control Commands
• Modification Commands
• Print Position Commands
• Font Commands
• Barcode Commands
• 2D Code Commands
• System Commands
• Memory Card Commands
• Intelligent Command
• Graphic Commands

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-1 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CONTROL COMMANDS

START/STOP LABEL
FUNCTION For all print jobs, the Start command must precede the data and the Stop command must
follow. The print job will not run properly if these are not in place.

FORMAT Start Command: <ESC>A

Stop Command: <ESC>Z

<ESC>A must precede data <ESC>Z must follow data.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0001<ESC>V0100<ESC>WB1SATO
<ESC>H0130<ESC>V0200<ESC>B103150*SATO*
<ESC>H0170<ESC>V0360<ESC>L0202<ESC>S*SATO*
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES There is no output for these commands they are not accompanied by other label printing commands.
However, these commands must precede and follow each print job sent to the printer.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-2 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT QUANTITY
FUNCTION To specify the total quantity of labels to print for a given print job.

FORMAT <ESC>Qaaaaaa

aaaaaa = Total number of labels to print (1 to 999999)

Place just preceding <ESC>Z, unless <ESC>~ exists, then preceding that command. This
command must be present in every print job.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>WB1SATO
<ESC>Q3
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT Three labels containing the data “SATO” will be printed.

NOTES To cancel a print job, turn off the printer or send the <ESC>CAN code if using the Bi-Com mode. Multi-
Buffer jobs can be cleared with the Clear Print Job (<ESC>*) and Memory command.
When used with the Sequential Numbering (<ESC>F) command, the Print Quantity value should be
equal to the total number of labels to be printed.
If a Print Quantity is not specified, the printer will not print a label.
For this command, leading zeroes do not have to be entered. The command “Q1” is equivalent to
“Q000001”.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-3 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

JOB ID, STORE

FUNCTION To add an identification number to a job. The status of the job can then be determined using
the ENQ command in the Bi-Com status mode.

FORMAT <ESC>IDaa

aa = Job ID assigned (00 to 99)

Place immediately following the <ESC>A in the job data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>ID01
<ESC>V200<ESC>H100<ESC>P0<ESC>$B,100,100,6
<ESC>$=SATOPRINTER
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES When status return is used on interface protocol, the specified Job ID Number can be set at the
telegraphic status. The status can confirmed by sending status request (ENQ).
Status return interface protocol is valid when status request (ENQ) is received during printing. At the
status return interface protocol,

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-4 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

JOB NAME
FUNCTION This command is to identify a particular job using a descriptive name.

FORMAT <ESC>WKnnn. . . n

nn..n = Job Name assigned, up to 16 ASCII characters

Place immediately following the <ESC>A in the job data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>WKSATO
. . . Job . . .
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output. The information is returned to the host upon
receipt of a Bi-Com status request.

NOTES Works only in Bi-Com 4 mode. The Job Name must be stored before Bi-Com status mode can be used.
If more than one Job Name is sent in a single job, i.e.
<ESC>A
<ESC>WKSATO
..........
<ESC>WKSATO AMERICA
.........
The last name transmitted will be used.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-5 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

MODIFICATION COMMANDS

CHARACTER, EXPANSION
FUNCTION To independently expand characters in both the horizontal and vertical directions. The
command allows enlargement of the base size of each font (except the vector font) up to 12
times in either direction.

FORMAT <ESC>Laabb

aa = Multiple to expand horizontally (01 to 12)

bb = Multiple to expand vertically (01 to 12)

Place preceding the data to be expanded.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>XMSATO
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0200<ESC>L0402<ESC>XMSATO
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0300<ESC>L0204<ESC>XMSATO
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-1)

NOTES Expanded characters are typically used with this command for added emphasis or for long distance
readability. This command will expand the following fonts: Fonts U, S, M, XU, XS, XM, OA & OB and
fonts WB, WL, XB and XL.
This command will also affect the following commands: Character Pitch Characters, Custom-Designed
The Character Expansion value is in effect for the current print job until a new expansion command is
specified.
The Line and Box command, if used within the data stream, may return all subsequent text to the
default expansion of 1 x 1. Therefore, either send the Character Expansion command before all printed
data, or send Line and Box commands last, preceding the Quantity (<ESC>Q) command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-6 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CHARACTER, PITCH
FUNCTION To designate the amount of spacing (in dots) between characters. This command provides a
means of altering character spacing for label constraints or to enhance readability.

FORMAT <ESC>Paa

aa = Number of dots between characters (00 to 99)

Place preceding the text to be printed.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0075<ESC>L0202<ESC>XB1SATO
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0175<ESC>L0202<ESC>P20<ESC>XB1SATO
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0275<ESC>L0202<ESC>P40<ESC>XB1SATO
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-2)

NOTES This command is affected by the <ESC>L Character Expansion command. The character pitch is
actually the product of the current horizontal expansion multiple and the designated pitch value.
Example:
<ESC>L0304
<ESC>P03
Pitch = (03) x (03) = 9 dots
To avoid confusion, you may want to include the <ESC>L Character Expansion command and this
command together in your program.
This command affects fonts U, S, M, XU, XS, XM, OA & OB, WB, WL, XB and XL, and the vector font.
Character Pitch will always revert to the default value unless it is specified before each new font
command in the data stream.
This command also affects Codabar, Code 39 and Industrial 2 of 5 bar codes.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-7 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CHARACTER, FIXED SPACING

FUNCTION To reset proportional spacing and place the printer back to fixed spacing.

FORMAT <ESC>PR

Place preceding the fixed space data.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0050<ESC>PS
<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMPROPORTIONAL SPACING
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0180<ESC>PR
<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMFIXED SPACING
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-3)

NOTES This command only works with proportionally spaced fonts: XU, XM, XS, XL and XB.

CHARACTER, PROPORTIONAL SPACING

FUNCTION To specify the printing of proportional or fixed spacing for proportionally spaced fonts.

FORMAT <ESC>PS Set to proportional spacing Reset to fixed spacing.

Place preceding the data to be proportionally spaced.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0050<ESC>PS
<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMPROPORTIONAL SPACING
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0180<ESC>PR
<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMFIXED SPACING
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-4)

NOTES Once this command is sent in the data stream, it is in effect until the end of the print job unless a reset
command is sent.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-8 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

ROTATE, FIXED BASE REFERENCE POINT

FUNCTION To rotate the print direction in 90° increments without changing the location of the base
reference point. The diagram below illustrates the use of the Rotate (<ESC>%) command.
Note that the entire print area is shown, but your label will probably not be as large as the
entire area.

FORMAT <ESC>%a

a = 0: Sets print to normal direction

1: Sets print to 90°CCW
2: Sets print to 180° rotated (upside down)
3: Sets print to 270° CCW

Place preceding any printed data to be rotated.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>%0<ESC>L0202<ESC>H0200<ESC>V0100<ESC>MNORMAL DIRECTION
<ESC>%1<ESC>H0200<ESC>V0300<ESC>MONE
<ESC>%2<ESC>H0200<ESC>V0400<ESC>MTWO
<ESC>%3<ESC H0200<ESC>V0500<ESC>MTHREE
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-5a)

NOTES The specified values are valid until another Rotate (<ESC>%) command is received. Receipt of a Stop
Print (<ESC>Z) command will reset the setting to the default value.
(4-5b)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-9 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SEQUENTIAL NUMBERING
FUNCTION To print sequential fields (text, bar codes) where all incrementing is done within the printer.
Up to eight different sequential fields can be specified per label. Sequencing is effective for
up to 99-digit numeric data within each field.

FORMAT <ESC>Faaaabcccc,dd,ee,g

aaaa = Number of times to repeat the same data (0001 to 9999)

b = Plus or minus symbol (+ for increments; - for decrements)

cccc = Value of step for sequence (0001 to 9999)

dd = Sequential numbering digit quantity (01 to 99). The first character

starts after those exempted in ee. If digits are omitted, 8 is default

ee = Number of digits free from sequential numbering (0 to 99) starting with

the right most position. If digits are left out, the default is 0.

g = Count base 1 Decimal Count 2 Hexadecimal Base

Place preceding the starting value to be incremented or decremented.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>MSERIAL NUMBER:

<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0200
<ESC>F0001+0005
<ESC>L0202<ESC>M1000<ESC>Q2<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-6a)

NOTES The value specified for Print Quantity should be equal to the number of different sequential values
desired multiplied by the number of repeats specified. Example: To print 2 sets each of numbers 1001-
1025 on separate labels, we need 50 total labels.
<ESC>F001-001,04,03
(4-6b)

It is necessary to specify the print position for each sequential field on a label. Up to eight different
sequential fields can be specified per label. Alpha characters are ignored.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-10 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT CIRCLES
FUNCTION Specifies the printing of circles.
FORMAT <ESC>FCaaabbbcd
a = 5 to 999 dots (radius)
b = 1 to 999 dots (line width)
c = 0 to 8 (section number) (Omissible. If digit is left out, the default is 0.
For more details, see the section number below.
d = 0 to 3 (pattern) (Omissible. If digit is left out, the default is 0.)
0: Solid black line
1: Gray 1
2: Gray 2
3: Gray 3
EXAMPLE Solid line circle of 100 dots in radius, 8 dots in line width.
<A>
<V>100<H>200<FC>,100,8,0,0
<Q>
<Z>
OUTPUT Section number

Section 0０ Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7 Section 8

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-11 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT CIRCLES
NOTES 1. When a sectional number value outside of the range is specified, it will be processed as “0.”
(Command error will not occur.)
2. When the pattern designation value is outside of the range specified, it will be processed as
“0.” (Command error will not occur.)
3. When the print start position is outside of the printable area, printing will not be performed
due to command error.
4. This command sets the base reference point to the center of a circle.

0,0

<V>100

<H>200
100 in radius

5. This command can be registered to the format.

6. If setting the line width wider, it will be widened to the inside circle.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-12 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT TRIANGLES
FUNCTION Specifies the printing of triangles.
FORMAT <ESC>FT,aaaa,bbbb(,cccc,d)
a = 10 to 2000 dots (side length)
b = 1 to 1000 dots (line width)
c = 10 to 2000 (base length) (Omissible. If digits are left out, its value will be
equal to the length of sides.)
d = 0 to 3 (pattern) (Omissible. If digit is left out, the default is 0.)
0: Solid black line
1: Gray 1
2: Gray 2
3: Gray 3
EXAMPLE Side length: 100 dots. Line width: 8 dots. Base length: 100 dots.
<A>
<V>100<H>200<FT>,100,8,100,0
<Q>2
<Z>
OUTPUT
NOTES 1. When the pattern designation value is outside of the range specified, it will be processed as
“0.”
2. When the print start position is outside of the printable area, printing will not be performed
due to command error.
3. When the base length is not equal to the length of sides, printing will not be performed due
to command error.
4. This command sets the base reference point to the apex of the triangel.

4. This command sets the base reference point to the apex of the triangle.
0,0
<V>100

<H>200

a a a: Side length
b: Base length
b

5. This command can be registered to the format.

6. If setting the line width, it will be widened to the inside triangle.
7. When setting an odd number to the base length, 1 will be added to the base length
automatically.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-13 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT, LINES & BOXES

FUNCTION To print horizontal lines, vertical lines, and boxes as images on the label.

FORMAT Line: <ESC>FWaabcccc

aa = Width of horizontal line in dots (01 to 99)

b = Line orientation H Horizontal line V Vertical Line

cccc = Length of line in dots

Box: <ESC>FWaabbVccccHdddd

aa = Width of horizontal side in dots (01 to 99)

bb = Width of vertical side in dots (01 to 99)

cccc = Length of vertical side in dots

dddd = Length of horizontal side in dots

Place following the necessary positioning commands.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>FW20H0200
<ESC>H0320<ESC>V0100<ESC>FW20V0200
<ESC>H0350<ESC>V0100<ESC>FW1010H0200V0200
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-7)

NOTES It is recommended that all lines and boxes be specified in the normal print direction. Use the
<ESC>EX0 Expanded Print Length command for maximum label length.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-14 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

REVERSE IMAGE
FUNCTION To reverse an image area from black to white and vice versa. Use the Print Position
commands (<ESC>H and <ESC>V) to locate the top left corner of the reverse image area.

FORMAT <ESC>(aaaa,bbbb

a = Horizontal length in dots of reverse image area

b = Vertical height in dots of reverse image area.

Must be preceded by all other data and be placed just before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0120<ESC>L0202<ESC>WB1REVERSE
<ESC>H0250<ESC>V0300<ESC>L0202<ESC>WB1HALF
<ESC>H0040<ESC>V0110<ESC>(370,100
<ESC>H0240<ESC>V0290<ESC>(220,47
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-8)

NOTES A reverse image area is affected by the rotate commands. Therefore, always assume the printer is in
the normal print orientation when designing and sending the Reverse Image command.
If using reverse images with the form overlay, place this command before the Form Overlay command
in the data stream.
If the height and width to be reversed contains anything other than alphanumeric data, the area is not
printed.
If the values specified exceed the maximum ranges, the reverse image is not created.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-15 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FORM OVERLAY, STORE

FUNCTION To store a label image in the volatile form overlay memory. Only one label image may be
stored in this memory area at a time.

FORMAT <ESC>&

Must be preceded by all other data and placed just before Stop (<ESC>Z) command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0125
<ESC>STHIS IS THE STORED IMAGE WITH A BARCODE
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0165<ESC>B103100*12345*
<ESC>&
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output. It stores the label image in the overlay buffer.

NOTES Remember that this storage is volatile. Therefore, if the printer loses power, the overlay must be sent
again.
The overlay is recalled using the Form Overlay Recall (<ESC>/) command.
Form overlays do not have to be recompiled each time they are called to be printed and therefore may
result in much faster print output.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-16 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FORM OVERLAY, RECALL

FUNCTION To recall the label image from the form overlay memory for printing. Additional or different
data can be printed with the recalled image.

FORMAT <ESC>/

Must be preceded by all other data and placed just before Print Quantity (<ESC>Q)
command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H01000<ESC>V0125
<ESC>STHIS IS THE STORED IMAGE WITH A BARCODE
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0165<ESC>B103100*12345*
<ESC>&<ESC>Z
<ESC>A<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0050
<ESC>STHIS IS RECALLING AND ADDING TO THE STORED IMAGE<ESC>/
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-9)

NOTES The overlay is stored using the Form Overlay Store (<ESC>&) command.
If this command is used with the Expanded Print Length (<ESC>EX0) command the Form Overlay
length cannot exceed 9999 dots.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-17 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

REPLACE DATA (PARTIAL EDIT)

FUNCTION To replace a specified area of the previous label with new data. This command will cause the
previous label to print along with any changes specified within the current data stream.

FORMAT <ESC>0 (<ESC>zero)

Must follow <ESC>A and precede all other print data

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0020<ESC>WB0Company Name
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0085<ESC>WB1SATO
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0150<ESC>WL0SATO
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0215<ESC>WL1SATO
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z
<ESC>A
<ESC>0<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0020<ESC>WB0SATO
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-10)

NOTES Specify the exact same parameters for the image to be replaced as were specified in the original data
stream; including rotation, expansion, pitch, etc. This will ensure the new data will exactly replace the
old image. If the replacement data contains fewer characters than the old data, then the characters not
replaced will still be printed.
This command will not function if the power has been cycled off and back on since the last label was
printed.
Proportional Pitch text cannot be used with this command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-18 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

COPY IMAGE AREA (PARTIAL COPY)

FUNCTION To copy an image from one location to another on the same label. This may be useful for
duplicating individual fields or entire sections of the label with only one command.

FORMAT <ESC>WDHaaaaVbbbbXccccYdddd

aaaa = Horizontal position of the top left corner of the area

bbbb = Vertical position of the top left corner of the area

cccc = Horizontal length of the image area to be copied

dddd = Vertical length of the image area to be copied

Place anywhere within the data stream after specifying the location of the duplicate image.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0050<ESC>E010<ESC>XM
SATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATO
SATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATO
SATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATO
SATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATOSATO
<ESC>H0180<ESC>V0250<ESC>WDH0130V0050X0400Y0200
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-11)

NOTES Use the Print Position (V and H) commands to locate the new area for the duplicate image.
Position of the new target area must not be inside the original image.
If you use the Rotate command; the V, H, X, and Y axis will be reversed.
If the reference area of the target image exceeds the print area, it will not be printed.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-19 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

JOURNAL PRINTING
FUNCTION To print text in a line by line format on a label. By specifying this command, you automatically
select Font XS with a Character Expansion of 2x2. You also establish a base reference point
of H2,V2. The character pitch is 2 dots and the line gap is 16 dots. Simply issue an ASCII
<CR> at the end of each text line.

FORMAT <ESC>J

Place immediately following <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>J WITH THE JOURNAL FEATURE YOU CAN PRINT TEXT WITHOUT USING ANY
FONT COMMANDS OR POSITION COMMANDS
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-12)

NOTES Journal mode assumes a maximum label width. Otherwise, you may print where there is no label and
damage your print head.
It is effective only for the current print job.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-20 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

RECALL AND PRINT OF FONT & LOGO

FUNCTION Prints the downloaded font or logo specified.

FORMAT <ESC>RF

a = Font ID number (01 to 99)

b = Print digit (1 to 9999)

n = Print data

Place after <ESC>H but before <ESC>Q1.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>RF020002,826B
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-13)

NOTES Specify the value of Unicode for print data. When calling and printing a logo, specify Print digit: 0002,
Print data: <6B82>16. Note that <826B>16 is the value of Shift JIS code of L.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-21 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

MIRROR IMAGE
FUNCTION To allow mirror image printing of data, such as on transparent labels to be applied to a glass
or other transparent surface.

FORMAT <ESC>RM

Place after the label data.

EXAMPLE Label #1
<ESC>A
<ESC>A1<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0050<ESC>XL0ABCDEF
<ESC>RM
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-14)

NOTES The <ESC>A1 Media defines the area to be mirrored.

This command can be used with the Rotate Fixed Base Reference Point (<ESC>%) command. Note
that the reference point rotation is dependent upon the location of the <ESC>% command in the data
stream.
This command should not be specified more than once in any single job.
This command cannot be used with commands requiring re-editing of the print area, such as
Sequential Numbering, Real time clock or Copy Image Area.
Any data outside the area defined by the Media Size (<ESC>A1) command is not mirrored the
command is treated as a command error. Any print job containing the <ESC>RM command and
without any print data will be treated as a command error.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-22 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

VARIABLE DATA SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies variable data for small labels. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>_Daa,nn...n

a = Field number (01 to 99)

n = Variable data

Place after <ESC>H and <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>A106363060<ESC>600,1020,0,0
<ESC>_F
<ESC>_N01,04<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>_N02,07<ESC>V200<ESC>H200<ESC>L0202<ESC>B103200*11111*
<ESC>_N03,02<ESC>V100<ESC>H400<ESC>L0202<ESC>XM99
<ESC>_D01,AAAA<ESC>_D02,*22222*<ESC>_D03,22<ESC>_Q1
<ESC>_D01,BBBB<ESC>_D02,*33333*<ESC>_D03,33<ESC>_Q2
<ESC>_D02,*44444*<ESC>_D03,44<ESC>_Q4
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-15)

NOTES If Variable Data Specification <ESC>_D is omitted, the content specified under Format Specification
<ESC>_N will be printed. However, if variable data is specified from Variable Data Specification
<ESC>_D, it will continue to that content and printing.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-23 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SMALL LABEL START

FUNCTION To show the start of small label print specification. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>_F

Place after <ESC>H and <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>A106363060
<ESC>PD,600,1020,0,0
<ESC>_F
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>L0101<ESC>XMHEADER LABEL
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>_F
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>L0202<ESC>EMABCD
<ESC>V200<ESC>H200<ESC>L0202<ESC>B103200*11111*
<ESC>Q6
<ESC>_F
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>L0101<ESC>XMFOOTER LABEL
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-16)

NOTES If there is a sequential number specification after <ESC>_F, the sequential numbers will be printed on
every small label.
Small label print quantities specified under <ESC>_Q.
Do not specify registration specification from <ESC>_F onward. If specified, accurate print motion may
not be conducted.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-24 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FORMAT SPECIFICATION
FUNCTION Specifies small label format. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>_N

a = Field number (01 to 99)

b = Data digit (01 to 99)

Place before <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>A1,06363060<ESC>PD,600,1020,0,0
<ESC>_F
<ESC>_N,01,04<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>_N,02,07<ESC>V200<ESC>H200<ESC>L0202<ESC>B103200*11111*
<ESC>_N,03,02<ESC>V100<ESC>H400<ESC>L0202<ESC>XM22
<ESC>_D,01,AAAA<ESC>_D,02,*22222*<ESC>_D,03,22<ESC>_Q,1
<ESC>_D,01,BBBB<ESC>_D,02,*33333*<ESC>_D,03,33<ESC>Q,2
<ESC>_D,01,CCCC<ESC>_D,02,*44444*<ESC>_D,03,44<ESC>Q,4
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-17)

NOTES Only 1-D barcode characters can be specified under <ESC>_N.

Specify the small label print number with <ESC>_Q.
Do not specify command for registration after <ESC>_N. If specified, accurate print motion might not
be conducted.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-25 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

LABEL PRINT QUANTITY

FUNCTION Specifies the print number for small labels. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>_Q

a = Print quantity (0001 to 9999)

b = Blank label (omittable)

0: Auto new line
1-9: Blank label quantity

Place before <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>A106363060
<ESC>PD,600,1020,0,0
<ESC>_F
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>V200<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202
<ESC>B103200*11111*<ESC>_Q,4,2
<ESC>_F
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMBBBB
<ESC>V200<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202
<ESC>B103200*22222*<ESC>_Q,2,1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-18)

NOTES The print quantity of small label can be specified under <ESC>_Q.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-26 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SMALL LABEL SIZE SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies parameters relative to small label size. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>PD

a = Vertical dimension (480 to 3600 dots)

b = Horizontal dimension (480 to 1600 dots)

c = Label size (00 to 99 dots)

d = Multiple cut labels (01 to 99)

Place after the page size command.

EXAMPLE Vertical dimension: 600, horizontal dimension: 1020, label size: 0, multiple cuts: 2.
<ESC>A
<ESC>A106363060
<ESC>PD,600,1020,0,2
<ESC>V100<ESC>H100<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-19)

NOTES If <ESC>PD is different from <ESC>A1, it becomes an error. The specification of <ESC>_N relates to
after small labels of <ESC>PD. Specification <ESC>_D is ignored.
From <ESC>PD, horizontal column label numbers will be automatically calculated and printed.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-27 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

TELEGRAPHIC MESSAGE END SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies the telegraphic message end relative to small labels. Only applicable to the M10e
printer.

FORMAT <ESC>RE

a = Operates when ending

0: Discharge motion
1: Discharge motion + Cut motion

Place after <ESC>A but before <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>RE0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES After receiving <ESC>RE, the editing of horizontal row will be ended and will conduct feed motion. As
printing may end in the middle of the horizontal row label due to the print quantity, the label may result
in being blank.
The <ESC>RE command specifies telegraphic ending of small label at the printer driver and cannot be
combined with other standard commands.
The feed motion becomes “0” when the cutter feature is not available.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-28 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SHEET SENDING SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies paper delivery (feed operation) of marked unit (eye-mark, gap) for small label. Only
applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>RS

Place after <ESC>A but before <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>RS
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES Only used for single items.

The <ESC>RS command specifies the small label sheet sending of eye-mark unit at the printer driver
and cannot be combined with other standard commands.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-29 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

TWO-COLOR PRINT RANGE SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies a two-color print range. Only applicable to the CT400/410 printers.

FORMAT <ESC>2S

a = Head lock specification

0: Left side
1: Right side
2: Both sides

b = Start vertical position (specify label vertical size in dots)

c = End vertical position (specify label vertical size in dots)

Place before the quantity command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>A108000832
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0304<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>2S2V0001Y0600
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-20)

NOTES When <ESC>2S is used, also use the <ESC>A1 command.

Two-color print range can register to 10.
Print quantity will be influenced by print speed and print darkness.
Barcodes printed in two-color may not be clearly read by the scanner.
Use parameter “D” for print darkness <ESC>#E during two-color printing.
Black color printing cannot be performed inside of the block specified under <ESC>2S.
Two-color printing may not be clearly seen on the inner side of 2mm.
For CT400, the center position becomes closer to the left side from 4mm (32 dots) to the print head
center.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-30 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT POSITION COMMANDS

MEDIA SIZE (DOTS)

FUNCTION To set the size of the media.

FORMAT <ESC>A1aaaabbbb

aaaa = Label Height in dots (0 to Hmax)

bbbb = Label Width in dots (0 to Vmax)

Place in a separate data stream to the printer.

INPUT <ESC>A
<ESC>A108000640
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output. It is used to automatically adjust the offset
values for the size of label being used. The sample command stream specifies a label 640
dots wide by 800 dots long in 203 DPI.
(4-21)

NOTES The Base Reference point is always the on the right (looking at the front of the printer) side of the print
head. This command adjusts the Base Reference Point to correspond with the right edge of the loaded
media.
If the label size is changed, then this command must be respecified to center the print image on the
label.
All eight variables “aaaa” and “bbbb” must be included in this command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-31 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

MEDIA SIZE (MM)

FUNCTION Specifies the media size in millimeters.
FORMAT <ESC>A1aabbbccc
a = Media type: OT: Tag (Center hole tag, Side hole tag, Notched tag, I-
mark tag, Not sensor)
Media type: OL: Label (I-mark label, Gap label, Not sensor)
b = Height of media in mm: See the table below.
c = Width of media in mm: See the table below.
EXAMPLE <A>
<A1>0T060042
<Z>
<A>
<l1>
<V>100<H>200<P>2<L>0304<XS>ABCDE
<Q>
<Z>
OUTPUT
NOTES 1. For specifying the media size, include the size of backing paper.
2. If the media setting on the printer side and [Media type] are not equal, a command error will
occur
3. If [Media size check] in expansion setting is enabled, the validity of setting on the printer
side, and the setting specified by the Media Size <A1> command will be checked. If their
settings are not equal, a pitch size error will occur.
4. If a pitch size error occurs, the data received by the printer will be cleared. Check the
Media Size <A1> command again and send the print data. The Media Size <A1> command
can be omitted, but this command is required when printing multiple media.
5. When the use of sensor is prohibited, this command will be valid whether you select tag or
label for [Media type].

[Validity]
Media type Print area
Model Height of media in mm Width of media in mm
compatibility
TG308 Tag Standard 025 to 300 032 to 080
Expansion 025 to 300 032 to 100
Label Standard 019 to 300 025 to 080
Expansion 019 to 300 025 to 100
TG312 Tag Standard 025 to 240 032 to 080
Expansion 025 to 240 032 to 100
Label Standard 019 to 240 025 to 080
Expansion 019 to 240 025 to 100

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-32 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT POSITION
FUNCTION The Horizontal and Vertical commands specify the top left corner of a field or label, using the
current base reference point as an origin. They also establish a reference point for
subsequent fields until the next horizontal and/or vertical print position command is issued.

FORMAT Horizontal Position: <ESC>Haaaa

Vertical Position: <ESC>Vbbbb

aaaa = Number of horizontal dots from base reference point (1 to Hmax)

bbbb = Number of vertical dots from base reference point (1 to Vmax)

Place preceding any print field description of lines/boxes, fonts, bar codes, or graphics.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0050<ESC>L0303<ESC>MSATO
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0150<ESC>MSATO
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-22)

NOTES To expand the print length to the maximum limit, the Expanded Print Length (<ESC>EX0) command
must be used. If any part of an image is placed past maximum allowable dots across the label, that part
of the image will be lost.
Leading zeroes do not have to be entered - command “V1” is equivalent to “V0001”.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-33 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

OFFSET SPECIFICATION
FUNCTION Specifies label stop position. Only applicable to the CT400/410 printers.

FORMAT <ESC>PO

a = Offset specification
0: Cutter motion
1: Dispenser motion
2: Tear-Off motion
3: Continuous motion

b = Offset direction
+: Forward
-: Backward

c = Offset distance (00 to 99 dots)

Place after <ESC>A but before <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>PO3+08
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES It’s not necessary to specify <ESC>PO for normal label print.
Specify this command when a proper gap is located.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-34 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

START POSITION SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies the vertical print start position. Only applicable to the XL400/410e printers.

FORMAT <ESC>#

a = Shift direction
+: Forward
-: Backward

b = Shift distance
XL400e: 000 to 400 dots
XL410e: 000 to 600 dots

Place after <ESC>A but before <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>#+040
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-23)

NOTES The cut start position for tags will be shifted together with the change of start position.
The <ESC># command is valid for specification of every label or tag type.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-35 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

LABEL SIZE SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies label dimensions. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>RI

a = Sheet width (1500 to 3200 dots)

b = Sheet length (480 to 3600 dots)

c = Label width (0 to 60 dots)

d = Label length (00 to 60 dots)

e = Small label width (480 to 3200 dots)

f = Small label length (480 to 3600 dots)

g = Label width quantity (01 to 06)

h = Label length quantity (01 to 07)

Place immediately following <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>RI2196,1236,24,36,0700,0400,03,03
<ESC>A112362196
<ESC>RW02
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-24)

NOTES Command <ESC>RI data becomes error when different from <ESC>A1 specification.
The quantity of labels in the horizontal column will be automatically calculated and printed by <ESC>RI
command.
The <ESC>RI command sets information relating to label size at the printer driver and cannot be
combined with other standard commands.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-36 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

LABEL SIZE SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION Specifies the order or arrangement of small labels. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>RT

a = Print direction
0: Horizontal
1: Vertical

Place immediately following <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>RT0
<ESC>RI3200,1200,00,00,1600,0600,02,02
<ESC>A!12003200
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-25)

NOTES Command <ESC>RT specifies label print order of small labels by the printer driver and cannot be
combined with other standard commands.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-37 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FONT COMMANDS

FONTS: S, M, U, OA, OB, XB, XL, XS, XM, XU

FUNCTION To print text images on a label. These are eight of the built-in fonts available on the printer.
All matrices include descenders.

FORMAT Font XU: <ESC>XU Font U: <ESC>U

Font XS: <ESC>XS Font S: <ESC>S

Font XM: <ESC>XM Font M: <ESC>M

Font OA: <ESC>OA Font OB: <ESC>OB

Place preceding the data to be printed.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>PS
<ESC>H0001<ESC>V0100<ESC>L0202<ESC>XUSATO
<ESC>H0001<ESC>V0175<ESC>L0202<ESC>XSSATO
<ESC>H0001<ESC>V0250<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMSATO
<ESC>H0001<ESC>V0325<ESC>L0101<ESC>OASATO
<ESC>H0001<ESC>V0400<ESC>L0101<ESC>OBSATO
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0100<ESC>L0202<ESC>USATO
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0175<ESC>L0202<ESC>SSATO
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0250<ESC>L0202<ESC>MSATO
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-26)

NOTES Characters may be enlarged through the use of the Character Expansion command and character
spacing may be altered through the use of the Character Pitch command. The default is 2 dots
between characters. Custom characters or fonts may also be created - refer to Custom-Designed
Characters (<ESC>T) command.
It is recommended to use a spacing of 5 dots for OCR-A and 1 dot for OCR-B. The matrices for the OA
and OB fonts are scaled so that they will remain a constant size according to the OCR-A and OCR-B
specifications when printed on different resolution printers.
The proportionally spaced fonts XU, XS, XM, XL and XA can be printed with fixed spacing using the
Proportional Space (<ESC>PS) command.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 1 through 7 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-38 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SMOOTHING FONTS: WB, WL, XB, XL

FUNCTION To print text images on a label. These are the four auto-smoothing fonts available on the
printer.

FORMAT Font WB: <ESC>WBa Font XB: <ESC>XBa

Font WL: <ESC>WLa Font XL: <ESC>XLa

a = 0: Disables auto-smoothing of font

1: Enables auto-smoothing of font (see notes below)

Place preceding the data to be printed.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>PS
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>WB0SATO
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0185<ESC>WB1SATO
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0270<ESC>WL0SATO
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0355<ESC>WL1SATO
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0100<ESC>XB0SATO
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0185<ESC>XB1SATO
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0270<ESC>XL0SATO
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0355<ESC>XL1SATO
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-27)

NOTES Auto-smoothing (when enabled) is only effective if the character expansion rate is at least (3) times in
each direction.
Characters may be enlarged through the use of the Character Expansion (<ESC>L) command.
Character spacing may be altered through the use of the Character Pitch (<ESC>A) command.
A font must be defined for each field to be printed. There is no default font.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-39 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FONT, RASTER
FUNCTION To print point size characters created using font definitions.

FORMAT <ESC>A<ESC>RDabb,ccc,ddd,nn. . .n

a = A: Times
B: CG Triumvirate

bb = 00: Always

ccc = Horizontal size (4 - 999 dots or P02 - P99)

ddd = Vertical size (4 - 999 dots or P02 - P99)

nn..n = Data to be printed.

Place within the normal command stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0100
<ESC>RDA00,P28,P28,CG Times
<ESC>V0200<ESC>H0100
<ESC>RDB00,075,075,CG Triumvirate
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-28)

NOTES The “cccc” Horizontal Size and “dddd” Horizontal Size parameters can be entered either in dots or
points, but both parameters must use the same value types. If point size is used, the point size is
preceded by a “P”.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 8 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-40 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FONT, VECTOR
FUNCTION To specify printing of the unique SATO vector font. The vector font allows large characters to
be printed with smooth, round edges. Each character is made of a number of vectors (or
lines), and will require slightly more printer compiling time.

FORMAT Specify Vector Font: <ESC>$a,b,c,d

Data for Vector Font: <ESC>$=(data)

a = A: Helvetica Bold (proportional spacing)

B: Helvetica Bold (fixed spacing)

b = Font width (50-999)

c = Font height (50-999 dots)

d = Font variation (0-9) as follows:

0: Standard
1: Standard open (outlined)
2: Gray (mesh) pattern 1
3: Gray (mesh) pattern 2
4: Gray (mesh) pattern 3
5: Standard open, shadow 1
6: Standard open, shadow 2
7: Standard mirror image
8: Italic 9 Italic open, shadow

Place immediately preceding the data to be printed.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>$A,100,100,0
<ESC>$=SATO AMERICA
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0200<ESC>$=VECTOR FONT
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0350<ESC>$A,200,300,8<ESC>$=SATO
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-29)

NOTES The Pitch command can be used with Vector fonts. If the font size designation is out of the specified
range, a default value of 50 is used.
The font width and height values include ascenders, descenders, and other space. A font must be
defined for each field to be printed. There is not a default font.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-41 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FONT: XCL, XCS

FUNCTION To print text on a label. Specifies dot matrix font including descenders. Only applicable to the
XL400/410e printers.

FORMAT <ESC>XCL
<ESC>XCS

nn...n = Print data

XCL: 48 x 36 dots
XCS: 32 x 24 dots

Place immediately following the enlargement command <ESC>L.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0304<ESC>XCL,01234
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT Prints fonts of the prescribed type.

NOTES XCL and XCS fonts allow setting of fixed Pitch with 34 types of care symbols each.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 9 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-42 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

EXTERNAL CHARACTER RECALL TEXT FLOW

FUNCTION Specifies recall print specifications of vertical and horizontal text flow of external character
registered in printer memory. Commands k1 and k2 are for vertical recall and K1 and K2 are
for horizontal.

FORMAT <ESC>K1, K2, k1, or k2

a = External specification mode

H: HEX character specification
B: Binary code specification
I: With smoothing function (HEX code)
C: With smoothing function (binary code)
J: With highlighting function (HEX code)
D: With highlighting function (binary code)
K: With smoothing & highlighting function (HEX code)
E: With smoothing & highlighting function (binary code)

b = JIS registration code

H, I, J, K: 9021 to 907F
B, C, D, E: 9021H to 907FH
Shift JIS registration code
H, I, J, K: F040 to F09E
B, C, D, E: F to F09EH

Place after <ESC>V and <ESC>H but before <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE Example with 24 x 24 external callout specification, HEX code data of JIS
<ESC>A
<ESC>T1H21
00FF . . . . . . . . . . FF00
<ESC>Z
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>K1H9021
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z
Example with 16 x 16 external callout specification, binary code data of Shift JIS
<ESC>A
<ESC>T2B<ESC>40
00FF . . . . . . . . . . FF00
<ESC>Z
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>k2B<ESC>90<ESC>40
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT These commands do not result in visual printer output.

NOTES Re-register if normal printing is not conducted.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-43 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

STORE 16X16 DOTS EXTERNAL CHARACTER

FUNCTION Register external character of 16x16 dots in memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>T1abbn~n

a = Data type =
H: Hex character
B: Binary code

b = Registration font code address

<ESC>JIS
H: “21” to “7F” Up to 95 registries
B: 21H to 7FH Up to 95 registries
<ESC>Shift JIS
H: “40” to “9E” Up to 95 registries
B: 40H to 9EH Up to 95 registries

n = External character data

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>T1H2100FF00FF ∼ 3C0000FF
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT

External file 16 x 16

D1 D2

D3 D4
D5 D6

D31 D32

NOTES 1. Existing data can be overwritten.

2. The Card Slot <ESC>CC command must be sent prior to this

command.

3. An error may occur due to capacity shortage when this command

and other commands related to registration are used at the same time.
In such a case, you need to store the data on another card or replace
the card with a card of larger capacity.

4. Data will be out in the order as shown in the output illustration

above.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-44 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

STORE 24X24 DOTS EXTERNAL CHARACTER

FUNCTION Register external character of 24x24 dots in memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>T2abbn~n

a = Data type =
H: Hex character
B: Binary code

b = Registration font code address

<ESC>JIS
H: “21” to “7F” Up to 95 registries
B: 21H to 7FH Up to 95 registries
<ESC>Shift JIS
H: “40” to “9E” Up to 95 registries
B: 40H to 9EH Up to 95 registries

n = External character data

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>T2H2100FF00FF ∼ 3C0000FF
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT

External file 24 x 24

D1 D2 D3

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D70 D71 D72

NOTES 1. Existing data can be overwritten.

2. The Card Slot <ESC>CC command must be sent prior to this command.
3. An error may occur due to capacity shortage when this command and other
commands related to registration are used at the same time. In such a case,
you need to store the data on another card or replace the card with a card of
larger capacity.
4. Data will be out in the order as shown in the Output illustration above.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-45 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BARCODE COMMANDS

BAR CODES
FUNCTION To print bar code images on a label.

FORMAT 2:5 narrow/wide ratio: <ESC>BDabbcccn...n

1:3 narrow/wide bar ratio: <ESC>Babbcccdn...n

1:2 narrow/wide bar ratio: <ESC>Dabbcccdn...n

a = 0: Codabar
1: Code 39
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2/5)
3: UPC-A / EAN-13
4: EAN-8
5: Industrial 2 of 5
6: Matrix 2 of 5
7: reserved
8: reserved
9: reserved
A: MSI
B: reserved
C: Code 93
D: reserved
E: UPC-E
F: Bookland
G: Code 128
I: SSCC/UCC128

bb = Number of dots (01-12) for narrow bar and narrow space

ccc = Bar height in dots (001-999)

d = SSCC/UCC128 only. Not used for other bar code types

0: No human readable text
1: Human readable at top
2: Human readable at bottom

Place immediately preceding the data to be encoded.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-46 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BAR CODES
EXAMPLE Note: Carriage Returns and Line Feeds have been added to the command listing for clarity and should
not be included in the actual data stream.
<ESC>A
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0025<ESC>B103100*CODE 39*
<ESC>H0155<ESC>V0130<ESC>XS*CODE 39*
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0200<ESC>BD20210045676567
<ESC>H0075<ESC>V0310<ESC>XM45676567
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0375<ESC>BD30215001234567890
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0600<ESC>BD50210012345
<ESC>H0175<ESC>V0710<ESC>XS12345
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0775<ESC>BD60210012345
<ESC>H0105<ESC>V0885<ESC>XS12345
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0950<ESC>BA03100123455
<ESC>H0095<ESC>V1060<ESC>XS12345
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V1125<ESC>BC03100081234ABCD
<ESC>H0080<ESC>V1240<ESC>XS1234ABCD
<ESC>H0525<ESC>V0025<ESC>B002100A12345B
<ESC>H0565<ESC>V0135<ESC>XS12345
<ESC>H0475<ESC>V0200<ESC>BD303100123456789012
<ESC>H0525<ESC>V0375<ESC>BD4031001234567
<ESC>H0525<ESC>V0550<ESC>DE03100123456
<ESC>H0500<ESC>V0600<ESC>OB0<ESC>H0533<ESC>V0655<ESC>OB123456
<ESC>H0350<ESC>V0725<ESC>D30315009827721123
<ESC>L0101<ESC>H0320<ESC>V0800<ESC>OB0
<ESC>H0365<ESC>V0878<ESC>OB98277<ESC>H0505<ESC>V0878<ESC>OB21123
<ESC>H0665<ESC>V0760<ESC>BF0313021826
<ESC>H0680<ESC>V0730<ESC>OB21826
<ESC>H0425<ESC>V1125<ESC>D30315000633895260
<ESC>L0101<ESC>H0395<ESC>V1200<ESC>OB0
<ESC>H0440<ESC>V1278<ESC>OB06338<ESC>H0580<ESC>V1278<ESC>OB95260
<ESC>H0730<ESC>V1155<ESC>BF0314024<ESC>H0745<ESC>V1125<ESC>OB24
<ESC>H0325<ESC>V0950<ESC>BG03100>GAB>D789>C123456
<ESC>H0435<ESC>V1055<ESC>XSAB789123456<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-47 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BAR CODES
OUTPUT Without Incrementing:
<ESC>A<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100
<ESC>BI104150101234567000000001
<ESC>Q2<ESC>Z
(4-31a)

With Incrementing:
<ESC>A<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100
<ESC>F001+001<ESC>BI104150101234567000000001
<ESC>Q2<ESC>Z
(4-31b)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-48 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BAR CODES
NOTES Human readable data will be printed only when a valid Thin Bar Width is selected within the barcode
command and it complies to the following table:

Printer
DPI Valid Thin Bar Value (bb)
203 02, 03
305 03, 04
609 06, 07, 08

The Code 128, UCC 128, MSI, and Code 93 bar codes are not affected by the narrow to wide ratios.
The Codabar, Code 39, Industrial 2 of 5, and Matrix 2 of 5 bar codes are affected by the Character
Pitch command. This command must be placed before the Bar Code command.
Because of their unique characteristics, two-dimensional (2D) symbols are covered separately.
For UCC128, the FNC1 code is automatically inserted and the Mod 10 and Mod 103 check digits are
automatically calculated. For the MSI bar code, the check digit is not automatically calculated.
The <ESC>D and <ESC>BD commands are not valid for the MSI, Code 128, Code 93, UPC-E,
Bookland, UCC128 and Postnet symbologies.
A user can automatically print HRI without the d.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 11, 12, and 13 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-49 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BARCODE, HUMAN READABLE INFORMATION

FUNCTION To specify character type of barcode explanation words..

FORMAT <ESC>Dabbcccn~n+ <d>n~n

a = Barcode Type =
3: JAN/EAN-13
4: JAN/EAN-8
H: UPC-A

b = Thin Bar Width

valid range: 01~12 (dot)

c = Barcode Height:
valid range: 001~999 (dot)

n = Print Data (barcode data)

d = Character Type Specification =

XU
XS
XM
XB
XL
OA
OB
U#
S#
M#
WB#
WL#
# Is the old compatibility font.
n Print Data = Explanation Word Data

EXAMPLE Barcode type: JAN/EAN-13, Thin Bar Width: 02, Barcode Height: 120,
Barcode data: 4902471006795, Character Type: XS, Explanation Word Data:
4902471006795
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>D3021204902471006795
<ESC>XS4902471006795
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-50 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BARCODE, HUMAN READABLE INFORMATION

NOTES 1. To add human readable at the specified character type.
2. Data not within the specified value will not be printed out. When barcode ratio is small,
and HRI font type size is large, the Human Readable characters may overlap one another.
3. Human readable will be performed further at the appropriate location of printer.
4. Human Readable data will be printed only when a valid Thin Bar Width is selected within
the barcode command and it complies to the following table.

Printer
DPI Valid Thin Bar Value (bb)
203 02, 03
305 03, 04
609 06, 07, 08

5. A user can automatically print HRI without the d.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-51 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CODE 93
FUNCTION Specifies CODE93 barcode.

FORMAT <ESC>BCaabbbccn~n

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

b = Barcode Height (001 to 999 dots)

c = Data Digit Number (01 to 99)

n = Print Data (barcode data)

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>H0100<ESC>V0125<ESC>BC03100081234ABCD
<ESC>H0155<ESC>V0240<ESC>XS1234ABCD

OUTPUT (4-33)

NOTES The quantity of digit data and input data must be equal. A command error will occur if the digit data and
input data are not equal.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 14 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-52 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BOOKLAND
FUNCTION Specifies Bookland barcode.

FORMAT <ESC>BFaabbn~n

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 03dots)

b = Barcode Height (001 to 999 dots)

n = Print Data (numeric (0 to 9) 2 to 5 digits)

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>H0325<ESC>V0725<ESC>D30315009827721123
<ESC>L0101<ESC>H0295<ESC>V0800<ESC>OB0
<ESC>H0340<ESC>V0878<ESC>OB98277
<ESC>H0480<ESC>V0878<ESC>OB21123
<ESC>H640<ESC>V0760<ESC>BF0313021826
<ESC>H655<ESC>V0730<ESC>OB21826

OUTPUT (4-34)

NOTES Only numeric can be specified as print data. Refer to the attached table.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 15 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-53 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CODE128
FUNCTION Specifies CODE128 barcode.

FORMAT <ESC>BGaabbbn~n

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

b = Barcode Height (001 to 999 dots)

n = Print Data (barcode data and subset shift codes)

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>H0200<ESC>V0550<ESC>BG03100>GAB>B789>C123456
<ESC>H0310<ESC>V0665<ESC>XSAB789123456

OUTPUT (4-35)

NOTES Specify Start Code at the head of the data.

(1) Start Code A = <ESC>G
(2) Start Code B = <ESC>H
(3) Start Code C = <ESC>I
When using “Start Code C”, specify the print data in even numbered digits.
When the print data contains an odd number of digits, specify “Start Code A” or B” to change the first
character of the print data.
Examples:
1) 15 digits [123456789012345]
<ESC>B1<ESC>C23456789012345
2) 9 digits/Alphanumeric 6 digits [123456789ABC123]
<ESC>C12345678<ESC>B9ABC123
If using “Start Code C” to specify an odd numbered digit, “0” will be added to the end of the print data
before printing.
When a Start Code is omitted, data will be printed with “Start Code B”.
Shift codes are used to change the subset type within the barcode data. Shift codes:
E Subset A Shift Code
D Subset B Shift Code
C Subset C Shift Code
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 16 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-54 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SSCC/UCC128
FUNCTION Specifies SSCC (Serial Shipping Container Code) barcode.

FORMAT <ESC>BIaabbbcn~n

a = Narrow bar width (01 to 12 dots)

b = Barcode Height (001 to 999 dots)

c = Barcode Expository Font Specification

0: Not Human Readable
1: Human Readable (upper part)
2: Human Readable (lower part)

n = Print Data
For barcode data, refer to the UCC/EAN128 code table. EAN128 (Barcode
for Standard Carton ID) fixed 18 digits:
Identifier of a continuous code for freight packaging
Digit 1: Container type
Digits 2 to 8: Shipper identification
Digits 9 to 17: Container sequential numbering
Note that check digit is automatically added; therefore, specify data in 17 dig-
its excluding check digit.

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE Without incrementing:

<ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>BI10415010123456000000001
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z
With incrementing:
<ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>F001+001
<ESC>BI104150101234567000000001
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-55 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SSCC/UCC128
OUTPUT Without incrementing:
(4-36a)

With incrementing:
(4-36b)

NOTES UCC128 code is exclusive to Standard Carton ID. When printing in EAN128, designed for the markets
in the medical, fresh food, or flowers and plants, use CODE128 Barcode <ESC>BG to specify print
data with application identification or separator that matches each specification.
Start character code, function character, end character code, and identification code (corresponds only
to “00”) are added automatically.
Modulus 10 check character and modulus 103 check character are automatically generated.
Sequential number of barcode data is available.
Line pitch between barcode and expository font is fixed at 10 dots.
If the width of expository font is wider than that of the barcode, it starts printing from the print start
position of barcode.
If the width of expository font is narrower than that of the barcode, expository font will be aligned to the
center of barcode for printing.
Prints expository font in OCR-B.
If the expository font is outside of the print area, it will not be printed. When HRI is available, specify
Vertical Print Position (<ESC>V) and Horizontal Print Position (<ESC>H) in consideration of print of
expository font.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 17 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-56 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

UPC-A BARCODE (NO HRI)

FUNCTION Specifies UPC-A Barcode with start/end bar in the same length with guard bar.

FORMAT <ESC>BLabbcccn~n

a = Barcode type = H: UPC-A(“H”Fixed)

b = Narrow bar width = Valid range : 01 to 12 dots

c = Barcode height = 001 to 999 dots

n = Print data = Data: 11 digits fixed

EXAMPLE Barcode type: UPC-A, Narrow bar width: 03, Barcode height: 120, Print data: 01234567890
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H100<ESC>BLH0312001234567890
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT

NOTES 1. This command supports UPC-A. Selecting barcode type other than “H” will result in a
command error.
2. Refer to the following settings.

Barcode setting
Guard bar HRI Ratio
Yes No Fixed

3. If a parameter is specified out of the range, its behavior will not be supported.
4. When using command <ESC>D to print UPC-A, the character bars will be all in the same
length. The command <ESC>BL will print the start bar and end bar in the same length as that of
guard bars.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-57 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

UPC-A BARCODE (FONT DESIGNATION)

FUNCTION Specifies font type of UPC-A (with HRI characters)

FORMAT <ESC>BLabbcccn~n ~ <d>n~n

a = Barcode type = H: UPC-A (“H” fixed)

b = Narrow bar width = Valid range: 01 to 12 dots

c = Barcode height = 001 to 999 dots

n = Print data = Barcode data: 11 digits fixed

d = Font =
XU
XS
XM
XB
XL
OA
OB
U
S
M
WB
WL

n = Print data = Interpretation data : 12 digits fixed

EXAMPLE Barcode type : UPC-A, Narrow bar width : 02, Barcode height : 120
Barcode data : 01234567890, Font type : X21, Translation data : 012345678905
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>BLH0212001234567890
<ESC>X21,012345678905
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-58 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

UPC-A BARCODE (FONT DESIGNATION)

NOTES 1. This command supports UPC-A only. Selecting barcode type other than “H” will be a command
error.
2. Recommended narrow bar width for UPC-A with HRI:
8 dot/mm resolution [02], [03]
12 dot/mm resolution [03], [04]
3. Calculate the 12th check digit of HRI data by using Modulus 10.
4. Refer to the settings in the table below.

5. If a parameter is specified out of the range, its behavior will not be supported.
6. The command <ESC>D with specifying font type to print UPC-A will print the character bars all in
the same length. On the other hand, the command <ESC>BL with font type selection will print the
start bar and end bar in the same length as that of guard bars.
When printing UPC-A with command <ESC>D followed by <font type> data, its HRI can be printed
from under the start/end bar, because the length of them is short. When printing UPC-A with
command <ESC>BL followed by <font type> data, character spacing of the HRI will be smaller than
command <ESC>BL because the length of start and end bars is longer.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-59 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

UPC-A BARCODE (WITH HRI)

FUNCTION Specifies UPC-A barcode with HRI characters. The start and end bar height will be the same
length as that of guard bars.

FORMAT <ESC>BMabbcccn~n
a = Barcode type = H : UPC-A (“H” fixed)

b = Narrow bar width = Valid range : 01 to 12 dots

c = Barcode height: 001 to 999 dots

n = Print data = Data : 11 digits fixed

EXAMPLE Barcode type : UPC-A, Narrow bar width : 02, Barcode height : 120, Print data : 20123948573
<ESC>A>
<ESC>V240<ESC>H100<BM>H0212020123948573
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-60 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

UPC-A BARCODE (WITH HRI)

NOTES 1. This command supports UPC-A only. Selecting barcode type other than “H” will be a command
error.
2. Recommended narrow bar width for UPC-A with HRI characters:
8 dots/mm resolution [02], [03]
12 dots/mm resolution [03], [04]
3. Refer to the following settings.

Barcode setting
Guard bar HRI Ratio
Yes Yes Fixed

4. If a parameter is specified out of the range, its behavior will not be supported.
5. The command <BD> with specifying font type to print UPC-A will print the character bars all in
the same length. On the other hand, the command <BM> will print the start bar and end bar in
the same length as that of guard bars.
When printing UPC-A with command <BD>, its HRI can be printed from under the start/end bar,
because the length of them is short. When printing UPC-A with command <BML>, character
spacing of the HRI will be smaller than command <BL>.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-61 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

POSTNET
FUNCTION To print Postnet bar codes.

FORMAT <ESC>BPn...n

n...n = 5 digits (Postnet-32 format)

6 digits (Postnet-37 format)
9 digits (Postnet-52 format)
11 digits (Postnet-62, Delivery Point format)

Place immediately preceding the data to be encoded.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0120<ESC>BP94089
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0160<ESC>BP123456
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0200<ESC>BP123456789
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0240<ESC>BP12345678901
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-37)

NOTES If the number of data digits does not match those listed, the command is ignored. Only numeric data
will be accepted.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 18 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-62 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

VARIABLE RATIO BARCODES

FUNCTION To print a bar code with a ratio other than those specified through the standard bar code
commands (B,BD, and D). This is done through individual control of each of the bar code
elements (bars, spaces) as shown above. Remember that this command only applies to the
five bar code types shown.

FORMAT <ESC>BTabbccddee

a = Bar Code Symbol:

0: Codabar
1: Code 39
2: Interleaved 2 of 5
5: Industrial 2 of 5
6: Matrix 2 of 5

bb = Narrow space in dots (01 to 99)

cc = Wide space in dots (01 to 99)

dd = Narrow bar in dots (01 to 99)

ee = Wide bar in dots (01 to 99)

Place following the print position commands and preceding <ESC>BW.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0050<ESC>BT101030103
<ESC>BW03100*1234*
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-38)

NOTES This command must be immediately followed by the Bar Code Expansion (<ESC>BW) command.
You may use only one variable ratio bar code per label.
If the data specified in this command is incorrect, the command is ignored and the ratio used will be
based on the previous setting.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-63 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BARCODE EXPANSION
FUNCTION This command works together with the <ESC>BT command to specify an expansion factor
and the bar code height for the particular symbol being printed.

FORMAT <ESC>BWabbb

aa = Expansion factor by which the width of all bars and spaces will be
increased (01 to 12)

bbb = Bar height by dot (004 to 999 dots)

Place immediately following the <ESC>BT command and preceding data to be encoded.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0050<ESC>BT101030103
<ESC>BW04100*1234*
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-39)

NOTES This command must be preceded by the Variable Ratio Bar Codes (<ESC>BT) command.
The following bar codes will be affected by the Character Pitch command: Codabar, Code 39,
Interleaved 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 19 and 20 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-64 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

EAN/UCC COMPOSITE SYMBOL

FUNCTION This command specifies the composite symbol of EAN/UCC.

FORMAT <ESC>EUaabbbn...n

a = 1D barcode symbology
Format 1
01: RSS-14
02: RSS-14 Truncated (13 digits maximum)
03: RSS-14 Stacked (13 digits maximum)
04: RSS-14 Stacked Omni-directional (13 digits maximum)
05: RSS Limited (13 digits maximum)
07: UPC-A (11 digits maximum)
08: UPC-E (10 digits fixed)
09: EAN13 (12 digits maximum)
10: EAN8 (7 digits maximum)
Format 2
11: UCC/EAN128 with CC-A/B (48 digits maximum)
12: UCC/EAN128 with CC-C (48 digits maximum)

b = Minimum bar width (01 to 12 dots)

c = Barcode height (001 to 500 dots, only applicable to Format 2)

n = Print data (sum of 1D and 2D codes up to 120 digits)

Between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z but following <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE Example using RSS-14:

<ESC>A
<ESC>H100<ESC>V100
<ESC>EU0104036123456789011990102
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-40)

(01) (02) (03)

(04) (05) (07)

(08) (09) (10)

(11) (12)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-65 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

EAN/UCC COMPOSITE SYMBOL

NOTES Both Formats
The parameter feature varies depending on 1D barcode symbology. The parameter for barcode height
is only designable for UCC/EAN128 (EU11, EU12).
The print data parameter can accept up to 120 digits for 1D and 2D data. For 2D data, when 1D
barcode symbology and alphanumeric are mixed, the designable data quantity may vary.
The entire composite symbol size changes depending on the specification of minimum bar width.
If the composite symbol exceeds the printable area, only the portion located within the area will print;
however, a scanner may occasionally read such a composite symbol.
If the value in 1D barcode symbology is not set to the data portion, the composite symbol will not print.
This command does not support the RSS Expand command.
Print of HRI cannot be designated with this command.
Rotation <ESC>% is available, but Enlargement <ESC>L is disabled.
Format 2
Barcode height (c) is specified when Minimum Bar Width is “01”. For instance, if setting Minimum Bar
Width to 03 and Barcode Height is 100, the Barcode Height will be 300 dots.
To specify the print of composite symbol, delimit 1D and 2D data with “I” (7Ch). Use “#” (23h) to specify
FNC1 (GS) of CC-C for PDF417) as data.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-66 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D CODE COMMANDS

PDF417
FUNCTION Specifies PDF417 of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>BKaabbcddeeffffg~g, h

a = Minimum Module Width (01 to 09 dots)

b = Minimum Module Height (01 to 24 dots)

c = Security Level (0 to 8)

d = Number of Data Code Words per Digit (01 to 30)

00: Automatic (width depends on data number specified)

e = Digit Number per Symbol (03 to 90)

00: Automatic (height depends on data number specified)

f = Data Digit Number (0001 to 2681)

g = Print Data (data)

h = PDF Code Type

When omitted: PDF417
T: Truncated scale
M: Micro PDF

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>V0100<ESC>H0100<ESC>BK0607400000021PDF417 PDF417 PDF417

OUTPUT (4-41)

NOTES The minimum module width can be set to 01 and 02; however, it may not read properly. 01, 02, and 03
are designable for minimum module height and may cause a reading problem.
If specifying “00” for Number of Data Code Words per Digit and Digit Number per Symbol, the size of
height to width (aspect ratio) will be at 1:2 based on the number of print data.
If increasing the security level, it is necessary to specify a higher value for Digit Number per Symbol or
Number of Data Code Words per Digit.
The maximum Digit Number of Data is 2681; however, it may vary depending on the specification of
minimum module size, security level, and print data type.
If the specification of parameter or number of data is not matching, printing will not be properly
performed.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 21 and 22 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-67 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

QR CODE
FUNCTION Specifies QR Code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>BQ (Manual setting)

<ESC>BQ (Auto setting)

a = Error correction level

1: 7% high density
2: 15% standard
3: 30% high reliability
4: 25%

b = Concentration mode
0: Normal mode
1: Concentration mode

c = Cell size (01 to 32)

d = Number of partitions by concentration mode (01 to 16)

e = Sequential number partitioned by concentration mode (01 to 16)

f = Concentration mode parity data (00 to ff)

g = Character mode
1: Number mode
2: Alphanumeric mode
3: Binary mode

h = Data number (0001 to 7366)

n = Data

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>BQ3010,112345
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-42)

NOTES Carry out XOR logic operation of all the partitioned print data of the QR code and then, specify this
operation data in hexadecimal character. This is referred to as “Parity Data”.
When the character mode is set to other than binary mode, it is not necessary to set the data number
parameter.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 23, 24, 25, and 26 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-68 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

MAXI CODE
FUNCTION Specifies Maxi code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>BVa, b, c, ddddddddd, eee, fff, n~n

a = Position of Maxicode symbol within set (1 to 8)

b = Total quantity of Maxicode symbols within set (1 to 8)

c = Mode
2: for Mode 2 carrier message for domestic UPS shipments
3: for Mode 3 carrier message for international UPS shipments
4: standard symbol
6: for reader

d = Zip Code (9 digit postal code)

e = Country Code (001 to 999)

f = Service Class (001 to 999)

n = Data determined by <ESC>

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0100
<ESC>BV1,1,2,123456789,840,001,[)<RS>01<GS>961Z01547089<GS>UPSN
<GS>056872<GS>348<GS>99999999<GS>001/005
<GS>029<GS>N<GS><GS>LENEXA<GS>KS<RS><EOT>
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-43)

NOTES For mode 2, specify up to 9 numeric digits; and for mode 3, specify fixed 6 digits (alphanumeric - use
English capital letters). “00H” cannot be specified for print data.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 27 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-69 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

DATA MATRIX CODE

FUNCTION Specifies Data Matrix Code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>BXaabbccddeeeffffghh

a = Format ID (01 to 06 dots)

b = Error Correction Level

00: ECC000
05: ECC050
08: ECC080
10: ECC100
14: ECC140
20: ECC200

c = Cell Width (01 to 16 dots/cell)

d = Cell Pitch (01 to 16 dots/cell)

e = Number of Cells per Line (008 to 148)

000: Automatic)

f = Number of Cell Line (008 to 148)

000: Automatic

g = Mirror Image
0: Normal Image (standard print)
1: Mirror Image

h = Guide Cell Size (01 to 15)

Place anywhere after <ESC>V but before <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0100
<ESC>BX05051010000000001
<ESC>DCDATA MATRIX DATA MATRIX
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-44)

NOTES If “20” is specified for Error Correction Level, the specification of Format ID, Mirror Image, and Size of
Guide Cell will be ignored.
“01” and “02” are designable for Cell Width and Cell Pitch; however, they may not read properly. In this
case, “00” will be an error.
If “000” is specified for Number of Cells per Line and Number of Cell Lines, optimum matrix size is
automatically set based on the number of data.
The thickness of normal type guide cell is “01”.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 28 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-70 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

DATA MATRIX CODE, DATA

FUNCTION Specifies data for the data matrix code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>DC

n = Print data

Place after <ESC>BX.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>BX05051010000000001
<ESC>DC1234567890
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT Must be used in conjunction with <ESC>BX to result in output.

NOTES This code must be placed after the <ESC>BX command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-71 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

DATA MATRIX CODE, SEQUENTIAL NUMBER

FUNCTION Specifies sequential numbering for the data matrix code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>FX

a = Quantity of duplications to print (001 to 999)

b = Flag of increase/decrease
+: Increase
-: Decrease

c = Quantity of increase/decrease (001 to 999)

d = Start position of sequential numbering (001 to 999)

e = Incremented data length from start position (001 to 999)

Place before <ESC>BX.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>FX001+001005003
<ESC>BX011002020000000001
<ESC>DC00006000
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT Label Set 1:

(4-45a)

Label Set 2:
(4-45b)

NOTES This code must be placed before the <ESC>BX command.

Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 29 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-72 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D10 (PDF417)
FUNCTION Specifies PDF417 of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>2D10,aa,bb,c,dd,ee,(f) <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n

a = Minimum module width (01 to 09 dots)

b = Minimum module height (01 to 24 dots)

c = Security level (0 to 8)

d = Quantity of data code words per line (10 to 30)

00: Automatic (width varies on data quantity specified)

e = Quantity of lines per symbol (03 to 90)

00: Automatic (width varies on data quantity specified)

f = Code type
0: Normal (if digit is omitted, the default is zero)
1: Truncated scale

m = Data size (1 to 2681 bytes)

n = Print data

Between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z but following <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE Example - Minimum module width: 03 dots, Minimum module height: 09 dots, Security level:
3, Words per line: 03, Lines per symbol: 18, Code type: Truncated.
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H100
<ESC>2D10,03,09,3,03,18,1
<ESC>DN0010,0123456789
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-46a)

NOTES Set the PDF417’s base reference point for printing with Vertical Print Position <ESC>V and Horizontal
Print Position <ESC>H (<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>2D10****).
(4-46b)

When d=e=00, the size of height to width (aspect ratio) will be at 1:2. If the specification of “d”, “e” and
the data quantity do not match, printing will not be properly performed. If increasing the security level, it
is necessary to specify a higher value for “d” and “e”. The minimum mode width can be set to 01 and
02; however, this may not be properly read. 01, 02, and 03 are designable for minimum module height;
however, a reading problem may result.
Sequential numbering is disabled with this command and print position cannot be specified by auto
linefeed. Designation of print for 00H-FFH and registration of format are enabled.
Increase the value of minimum module when selecting the higher print quality and increase the value of
security level when setting the read rate higher.
The height of printed characters may vary.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-73 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D12 (MICRO PDF417)

FUNCTION Specifies Micro PDF417 of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>2D12,aa,bb,c,dd,(e) <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n

a = Minimum module width (01 to 09 dots)

b = Minimum module height (01 to 24 dots)

c = Quantity of data code words per line (1 to 4 columns)

d = Quantity of lines per symbol (4 to 44)

e = Binary mode
0: Normal (if digit is omitted, the default is zero)
1: Binary

m = Data size (0001 to 0366 bytes)

n = Print data

Between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z but following <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE Example - Minimum module width: 02 dots, Minimum module height: 04 dots, Words per
line: 01, Lines per symbol: 14.
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H100
<ESC>2D12,02,04,1,14
<ESC>DN0010,0123456789
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-47)

NOTES <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n (when Binary mode is set to 1)

<ESC>DNn...n (when binary mode is set to 0)
The quantity of lines per symbol is set by the quantity of data code words per line. When the data
includes alphabet (uppercase/lowercase letters), numeric and control codes, the quantity of characters
used will affect the maximum data quantity.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 30 and 31 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-74 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D20 (MAXI CODE)

FUNCTION Specifies Maxi Code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>2D20,a(,bbb,ccc,d...d) <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n

a = Mode
2: Delivery only (numeric)
3: Delivery only (alphanumeric)
4: Standard symbol
6: Reader only

b = Service class (001 to 999 numeric)

c = Country code (001 to 999 numeric)

d = Postal code
Mode 2 (0 to 999999999, numeric only)
Mode 3 (000000 to 999999, alpha-numeric with capital letters)

m = Data size (1 to 138 bytes)

n = Print data

Between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z but following <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE Example - Mode: Delivery only (numeric), Service class: 003, Country code: 081, Postal
code: 123456789.
<ESC>2
<ESC>V100<ESC>H100
<ESC>2D20,2,003,081,123456789
<ESC>DN0010,0123456789
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-48)

NOTES Enter parameters for b, c, and d when selecting modes 2 or 3, omit them when selecting modes 4 or 6.
Modes 2 & 3: 123 maximum numeric print data, 84 alphanumeric.
Modes 4 & 6: 138 maximum numeric print data, 93 alphanumeric.
The size of Maxi code printed will not be affected by data quantity.
When designating a parameter other than specified or when the print data size does not match, printing
will not be performed.
When selecting modes 4 or 6, set data size (m) to 12 to allow the Maxi Code to be read by scanner.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 32 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-75 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D30/31 (QR CODE)

FUNCTION Specifies QR Code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>2D30,a,bb,c,d,(ee,ff,gg) <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n or <ESC>DSk,n...n

<ESC>2D31,a,bb,c,d,(ee,ff,gg) <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n or <ESC>DSk,n...n

a = Error correction level

L: 7%
M: 15%
Q: 25%
H: 30%

b = Cell size (01 to 32 dots)

c = Data setting mode

0: Manual
1: Automatic

d = Concentration mode
0: Normal
1: Concentration

e = Quantity of partitions by concentration mode (01 to 16)

f = Sequential number partitioned by concentration mode (01 to 16)

g = Concentration mode parity data (00 to FF)

k = Character mode
1: Numeric
2: Alphanumeric
3: Kanji

m = Data size
2D30: Model 2 (1 to 2953 bytes)
2D31: Model 1 (1 to 486 bytes)

n = Print data

Between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z but following <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE Example - Error correction level: 7%, Cell size: 05, Data setting mode: manual,
Concentration mode: normal.
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200
<ESC>2D31,L,05,0,0
<ESC>DS1,012345
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-49)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-76 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D30/31 (QR CODE)

NOTES Enter parameters for e, f, and g when selecting 1: Concentration (d), omit them when selecting
0: Normal.
Designation of print data will vary do to the setting of parameter c.
Parameter e allows specification/connection of QR Codes that were partitioned by concentration mode.
Parameter f allows specification of a specifically partitioned QR Code.
Parameter g carries out XOR logic operation of all partitioned print data of the QR Code, then specifies
this operational data in hexadecimal character (parity data).
Parameter k is to only be set if selecting data setting mode as 0: Manual. Binary specification is
available for this setting and its data designation command varies.
Parameter m is to only be set if XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
When designating a parameter other than specified or when the print data quantity does not match,
printing will not be performed.
For data portion, data designation command varies depending on the parameter setting or the data
selected.
Data Setting 1: Auto or for binary 0: Manual = <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n.
Data Setting for parameters other than binary in 0: Manual =
<ESC>DS1,n...n (Numeric)
<ESC>DS2,n...n (Alphanumeric)
<ESC>DS3,n...n (Kanji)
Enter parameters followed by data. When entering more data, specify the data consecutively or printing
will not be properly performed.
The total print data size (n) is to 7000 bytes. The maximum data blocks that can be entered is 200.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 33 and 34 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-77 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D32 (MICRO QR CODE)

FUNCTION Specifies QR Code of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>2D32,a,bb,c <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n or <ESC>DSk,n...n

a = Error correction level

L: 7%
M: 15%
Q: 25%

b = Cell size (01 to 32 dots)

c = Data setting mode

0: Manual
1: Automatic

k = Character mode
1: Numeric
2: Alphanumeric
3: Kanji

m = Data size (1 to 15 bytes)

n = Print data

Between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z but following <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE Example - Error correction level: 7%, Cell size: 04.

<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200
<ESC>2D32,L,04
<ESC>DS1,012345
<ESC>Q2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-50a)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-78 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D32 (MICRO QR CODE)

NOTES Binary specification is available for parameter k - its data designation command will vary.
Set parameter m when selecting binary.
When designating a parameter other than specified or when the print data quantity does not match,
printing will not be performed.
For data portion, data designation command varies depending on the parameter setting or the data
selected.
Data Setting 1: Auto or for binary 0: Manual = <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n.
Data Setting for parameters other than binary in 0: Manual =
<ESC>DS1,n...n (Numeric)
<ESC>DS2,n...n (Alphanumeric)
<ESC>DS3,n...n (Kanji)

Enter parameters followed by data. When entering more data, specify the data consecutively or printing
will not be properly performed.
The total print data size (n) is to 7000 bytes. The maximum data blocks that can be entered is 200.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 35, 36, and 37 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-79 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

2D50 (DATA MATRIX - ECC200)

FUNCTION Specifies Data Matrix (ECC200) of 2D code.

FORMAT <ESC>2D50,aa,bb,ccc,ddd <ESC>DNmmmm,n...n

a = Cell width (01 to 16 dots)

b = Cell height (01 to 16 dots)

c = Quantity of cells per line (000 fixed)

d = Quantity of cell lines (000 fixed)

m = Data size (1 to 3116 bytes)

n = Print data
Specify 7EH, 00H when printing 00H
Specify 7EH, 7EH when printing 7EH

Between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z but following <ESC>H and <ESC>V.

EXAMPLE Example - Cell width: 3 dots, Cell height: 3 dots.

<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200
<ESC>2D50,03,03,000,000
<ESC>DN0010,0123456789
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-51)

NOTES When designating a parameter other than specified or when the print data quantity does not match,
printing will not be performed.
When selecting the print format, leave more than 2mm margin around Data Matrix to be properly read
by scanner.
Data Format - Numeric: 3116, Alphanumeric: 2335, Binary (01H-FFH): 1556.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 38 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-80 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SYSTEM COMMANDS

PRINT SPEED
FUNCTION To specify a unique print speed through software for a particular label. This allows flexibility
in finding the best performance and quality for the particular label format, media, and ribbon.

FORMAT <ESC>CSa

a = Designates the speed selection in ips

Place immediately after <ESC>A and immediately before <ESC>Z in a separate data
stream.
Refer to the product manual for specific print speed increments.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A <ESC>CS6 <ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This becomes the new setting for all subsequent print jobs, unless changed. All subsequent labels will
print at this speed unless the speed is changed with this command or through the Operator Panel.
The setting is stored in non-volatile memory and is not affected by cycling the power.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-81 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT DARKNESS
FUNCTION To specify a new print darkness setting through software control for unique media and ribbon
combinations.

FORMAT <ESC>#Ea

a = Print Darkness Value

Must be placed immediately after <ESC>A and immediately before <ESC>Z in its own
separate data stream.
Refer to the product manual for specific print speed increments.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>#E2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This becomes the new setting in the printer configuration for all subsequent print jobs unless changed.
The setting is stored in non-volatile memory and is not affected by cycling power. The lightest setting is
the smallest value and the darkest setting is the largest value.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-82 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BASE REFERENCE POINT

FUNCTION To establish a new base reference point for the current label. The base reference point is the
top left corner or “origin” from where all print position commands are based. This command
may be very helpful when using labels less than four inches wide to place images on the
printable label surface. It may also be used to move images past preprinted fields on a label.

FORMAT <ESC>A3H-aaaa-Vbbbb

- = This character is optional. When present, it specifies that The

horizontal offset is in the negative direction. If it is left out the offset
direction is positive.

aaaa = Horizontal Print Offset (-Hmax to +Hmax)

bbbb = Vertical Print Offset (-Vmax to +Vmax)

Place preceding all images based on the new base reference point.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>L0202
<ESC>H0025<ESC>V0025<ESC>WB0MNORMAL REFERENCE POINT
<ESC>A3H0300V0075
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0050<ESC>WB0MNEW REFERENCE POINT
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-52a)

(4-52b)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-83 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

BASE REFERENCE POINT

NOTES Use of this command will set the printer’s Vertical/Horizontal Offset configuration until a new Base
Reference Point command is issued or the setting is changed from the operator panel.
This command may be used more than once in a print job.
An alternative to using this command is to make changes to your current Horizontal and Vertical Print
Position commands.
Example: If the current base reference point is H=1, V=1 and you wish to move all the fields on your
label downward vertically by 150 dots. You could either, (1) add the Base Reference Point command or,
(2) change all the vertical position commands by an additional 150 dots.
For a more detailed example of the Base Reference Point command, refer to the Introduction unit.
The printer will not “wrap” if any part of a character or image extends beyond the last print dot position.
It will disappear and not be visible on any part of the label.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-84 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT AREA, STANDARD, OR PRINT AREA, ENLARGEMENT

FUNCTION Specifies the print area to be standard height of 178 mm or enlarged to 356 mm.

FORMAT <ESC>AR Standard print area

<ESC>AX Enlarged print area

Place after <ESC>A within the data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>AR
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-53)

NOTES This command changes the print area of pitch direction.

Insert this command after Start of Data Transmission (<ESC>A). To return to the standard print area,
power off the printer to cancel the command.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 39 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-85 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT END POSITION

FUNCTION Changes the label stop position in the sensor disabled mode.

FORMAT <ESC>EP

Place after <ESC>A within the data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>EP
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES Specify as a set with Label Size command <ESC>A1 and only valid when sensor is disabled.
(4-54)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-86 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CUT, JOB
FUNCTION Regulates label cutting when using a cutter assembly with the printer. This command allows
the cutting of a multi-part tag or label at a specified interval within a print job.

FORMAT <ESC>~aaaa

aaaa = Number of labels to print between each cut (1 to 9999)

Place following the Print Quantity command <ESC>Q.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0020<ESC>V0020<ESC>XB1ABC<ESC>Q3
<ESC>~0002
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This set of commands will print 6 labels (3 x 2) with two labels between each cut.
(4-55)

NOTES The optional label cutter must be installed and the printer configured for its use for this function to be
valid. If the cut value is (a = 0), the cutter is inactive.
A “~” (tilde) character or <NUL> (ASCII 00 Hex) character can be used in this command. It is
recommended that the “~” be used whenever possible.
When using the Cutter command, the total number of labels printed is the product of the cut value and
the print quantity.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-87 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

MULTIPLE CUTS
FUNCTION Cuts a specified quantity of time for a specified quantity of labels resulting in one or more
labels between each cut sequence.

FORMAT <ESC>~(NULL)aaaa

a = Print quantity until cut (0 to 9999)

Place immediately following the <ESC>Q command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMABC
<ESC>Q4
<ESC>~2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-56)

NOTES Only valid for cutter specified models.

One cut per label when <ESC>~ is not specified at the Cut Motion Mode.
Do not perform cut when at a=0.
The accumulation of print labels and cut quantity shall not exceed a maximum of 999999.
Command <ESC>Q specifies the sheet quantity to be cut.
This command cannot be used in conjunction with the <ESC>~A command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-88 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CUT, LABEL
FUNCTION Regulates label cutting when using a cutter assembly with the printer. This command allows
the cutting of a multi-part tag or label at a specified interval within a print job. It differs from
the <ESC>~ Cut Job command in that it does not interact with the quantity command.

FORMAT ESC>~Aaaaa

aaaa = Number of labels to print between each cut (1 to 9999)

Place preceding the <ESC>Q Print Quantity command.

EXAMPLE This set of commands will print seven labels with two labels between each cut. One label will
be cut separately.

OUTPUT (4-57)

NOTES The optional cutter assembly must be installed and enabled to use this function.
If the cutter option has been enabled in the printer configuration and the cut value is (a = 0), the cutter
is inactive.
This command is independent of the <ESC>Q Quantity command. It will cut the specified number of
labels.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-89 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CUT, LAST
FUNCTION Regulates label feed and cutting when using a cutter assembly with the printer. This
command allows the cutting of a printed multi-part tag or label that is left in the printer after a
job is cut.

FORMAT <ESC>~B

Place in a separate data stream sent to the printer.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>~B
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command will feed the last printed label to the cut position, cut the label and then back
feed to the head position in preparation for printing the next job.
(4-58)

NOTES Only valid for cutter specified models.

Divide and use command <ESC>~B separate from commands <ESC>A and <ESC>Z and cannot be
used in combination with other commands.
Is only valid when at stop status without performing cut motion after print motion has ended.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-90 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

TEAR-OFF CORRECTION
FUNCTION Corrects tear-off value.

FORMAT <ESC>CBabb

a = Increment or Decrement
+: Increment
- : Decrement

bb = Distance to move (mm) -5 to 98

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CB+19
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
NOTES 1. If the command <ESC>CB-02 is executed after <ESC>CB+06, the tear-off position becomes -2 mm.
2. Maximum setting value is 98 mm. Values larger than that will be indicated as 98 mm.
3. Setting range is from -5 mm to 98 mm.
4. Setting value is effective after powering off the printer.
5. Current setting value will be printed in the TearOffset section of factory test print (2nd label).

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-91 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SENSOR SELECTION
FUNCTION Makes minor adjustments of darkness for the best print quality.

FORMAT <ESC>CIa

a = Sensor type
0 : Sensor is not used
1 : I-mark (CX-compatible)
2 : Transmissive

Default value is 2.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CI1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
NOTES

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-92 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SERIAL PORT
FUNCTION Sets serial port.

FORMAT <ESC>CRaaaaa,b,c,d
aaaaa = Baud rate
9600 : 9600bps
19200 : 19200bps
38400 : 38400bps

b = Parity
N : Non parity
O : Odd number
E : Even number

c = Data bit
7 : 7Bit
8 : 8Bit

d = Stop bit
1 : 1Bit
2 : 2Bit

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CR9600,N,8,1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
NOTES 1. This setting can be checked in user test print (3rd label).
2. Restart the printer to enable this command setting.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-93 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

RIBBON
FUNCTION Selects the use or disuse of ribbon.

FORMAT <ESC>CPa

a = Ribbon type
0 : Direct thermal (Ribbon is not required)
1 : Thermal transfer (Ribbon is required)

EXAMPLE <ESC>A

<ESC>CP1

<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
NOTES Ribbon type can be set.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-94 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CUT NUMBER UNIT

FUNCTION Cuts label at a specified interval in a print job.

FORMAT <ESC>CTaaaa

a = Number of labels between each cut =

Qty range : 0 to 9999

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202<ESC>X22,ABC
<ESC>CT2
<ESC>Q7
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
(1) Normal (complete) cut mode

Left on printer

Complete Complete Complete

CT 2
cut cut cut Complete
2 pcs cut
ABC

ABC

ABC

ABC

ABC

ABC

ABC
7 pcs
Q 7

Feed direction

NOTES 1. Valid only for cutter-mounted models.

2. If the parameter is not specified by this command <ESC>CT, each label will be cut after being
printed.
3. In case the parameter “a” is set to 0, no label will be cut.
4. Set this command before <ESC>Q command.
5. This command can not be used in combination with other cut commands <ESC>~ or <ESC>~A.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-95 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

INTERFACE
FUNCTION Specifies the interface used to connect with the host computer.

FORMAT <ESC>DI

a = Interface
0: USB
1: RS-232C / LAN / IEEE1284
2: Keypad
3: Scanner / Smart keyboard

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>DI0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
NOTES 1. Set this command between start code <ESC>A and stop code <ESC>Z.
2. This command will be valid after rebooting.
3. Set <ESC>DI2 to use Keypad. Only in this case, connection with Keypad will be checked and
supplied with power. While powering to Keypad, connection check will be executed at fixed intervals
and the printer stops supplying power when disconnected. Connection check will not be done after
that.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-96 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

MEDIA EJECTION
FUNCTION Enables forward and backfeed motion for cutting and printing. Applicable to the XL4e printer
series, and to the TG308e/TG312e.

FORMAT <ESC>EJ

Place in a separate data stream sent to the printer.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>EJ
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
(4-59)

NOTES 1. Feed motion is different due to the validation of cut motion.

2. This command was formerly called the Feed Specification command in this document, prior to
Version E.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-97 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

MEMORY AREA ENLARGE SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION To specify enlargement of Print Area (vertical direction).

FORMAT <ESC>EXa

a = Slot Number Specification =

0: Internal Memory

Place immediately preceding the data to be encoded.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>EX0
<ESC>ESCZ

OUTPUT
Print Resolution Standard Print Area Enlargement Print Area Standard Enlargement
Model Standard
(Head Density) <AR> <AX> <EX>0
CL408e
M-8400RVe 203dpi 1424dot 1424dot 2848dot 9999dot
CL608e （8dot/mm） (178mm) (178mm) (356mm) (1249mm)
M-5900RVe
CL412e 305dpi 2136dot 2136dot 4272dot 9999dot
CL612e （12dot/mm） (178mm) (178mm) (356mm) (833mm)
M-10e 305dpi 3600dot 3600dot 4188dot 5040dot
（12dot/mm） (300mm) (300mm) (349mm) (420mm)
XL400e 203dpi 2400dot 9999dot
（8dot/mm） （300mm） (1249mm)
XL410e 305dpi 2880dot 9999dot
（12dot/mm） (240mm) (833mm)
M-8485Se
203dpi 1424dot 1424dot 2848dot 9999dot
M-8460Se
(8dot/mm) (178mm) (178mm) (356mm) (1249mm)
M-8459Se
M-8490Se 305dpi 2136dot 2136dot 4272dot 9999dot
（12dot/mm） (178mm) (178mm) (356mm) (833mm)
M-84Pro-2 203dpi 1424dot 1424dot 2848dot 9999dot
(8dot/mm) (178mm) (178mm) (356mm) (1249mm)
M-84Pro-3 305dpi 2136dot 2136dot 4272dot 9999dot
（12dot/mm） (178mm) (178mm) (356mm) (833mm)
M-84Pro-6 609dpi 4272dot 4272dot 8544dot
(24dot/mm) (178mm) (178mm) (356mm)

The data inside parentheses ( ) is the value converted from dots to mm. The value was rounded off to the whole number (in order to
avoid the use of the decimal point).

NOTES 1. It cannot be used together with Internal Memory Register Data (Form Overlay Register,
Foreign Character Register)
2. When you specify slot at Memory Area Enlarge Specification <ESC>EX, specify it first
after printer power is switched On.
3. Standard Print Area Specification <ESC>AR and Enlargement Print Area <ESC>AX
become invalid.
4. If the number 1 is specified as parameter, print area will be enlarged at the internal
memory.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-98 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FORMAT MEMORY CARD

FUNCTION Specifies the format (initialization) of memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>FM

a = User ID =
Up to 8 bytes in alphanumeric and symbols

Place this command between <ESC>A start code and <ESC>Z stop code.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A>
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>FMSATO
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
NOTES 1. Make sure to specify the card slot number to be used for the <ESC>CC command before the
<ESC>FM command.
2. The <ESC>FM command is used for initializing a memory card and this command cannot be used in
combination with other commands.
3. Care should be exercised when using this command as it destroys any data previously written to the
card. SATO is not liable for any data loss.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-99 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT MEMORY CARD STATUS

FUNCTION Prints the status of the memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>FP

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>FP
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT
NOTES 1. This command is used to print the memory card status and cannot be used in combination with other
commands.
2. The status can be checked with the media of width 56 mm and height 90 mm.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-100 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

OFFLINE/PAUSE
FUNCTION Specifies when, and under what circumstances, the printer goes into an off-line state. When
used within a print job, the printer goes off-line after finishing the print job.

FORMAT <ESC>@,nn . . . n

nn...n = Optional display message on the LCD (32 characters max.)

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>@, LOAD BLUE LABELS AND PLACE PRINTER ON-LINE
...Job...
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output. The printer is placed in the Off-Line mode as
soon as the current print job is finished.

NOTES When using this command and the print job specifies <ESC>Q10, all ten labels will print before the
printer goes off-line. Press the LINE key to return the printer to an on-line status.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-101 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

ONLINE
FUNCTION Changes the printer from offline to online status.

FORMAT <ESC>OL

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>OL
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES Tis command is not valid in single-item mode.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-102 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

AUTO ONLINE
FUNCTION To allow the printer to power up in the Online mode ready to receive data.

FORMAT <ESC>AOa

a = 0: Printer automatically powers up in the Online mode.

1: Printer automatically powers up in the Offline mode.

Place in a separate command stream before label data is transmitted to the printer.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>AO1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This command can also be set using the LCD panel. The last setting received, whether it is via this
command or manually input via the LCD panel will be active.
The printer default setting can be set by user download.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-103 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

REPEAT LABEL
FUNCTION To print a duplicate of the last label printed.

FORMAT <ESC>C

Place immediately after <ESC>A and immediately before <ESC>Z in a separate data
stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>C
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT A duplicate of the previous label will be printed.

NOTES This command will not have an effect if the printer’s power is cycled off and back on since printing the
previous label.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-104 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

EEPROM SETUP
FUNCTION Registers the operation of the printer in EEPROM.

FORMAT <ESC>PG

Place immediately after <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>PG
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This command is not necessary with normal label printing. The operational settings specified are still in
effect after powering off the printer.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 40, 41, 42, and 43 for additional information.

FLASH ROM SETUP

FUNCTION Registers the operation of the printer in EEPROM.

FORMAT <ESC>PC

Place immediately after <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>PC26,1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES Go to the Advanced Mode or Service Mode for configuration. These command setting will remain in
effect after powering off the printer.
The entire or partial parameter entries is omissible by using commas for total settings. Any commas
that are omitted will result in those settings remaining as default.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 44, 45, 46, and 47 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-105 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SENSOR TYPE
FUNCTION To select a label sensing method for a print job.

FORMAT <ESC>IGa

a = 0: Reflective (Eye-Mark) sensor

1: Gap (transmissive) sensor
2: Sensor not used.

Place in separate data stream sent to the printer.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>IG1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES When the power is cycled, the value set by this command is lost and replaced by the default value
stored in the EEPROM.
To change the value stored in the EEPROM, use the Printer Setting (<ESC>PC) command.
The sensor type may also be set by the use of DSW2-2. The setting priority is determined by the
priority setting in the LCD,

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-106 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

IEEE1284
FUNCTION Specifies the receive mode and ACK width of IEEE1284.

FORMAT <ESC>I1abbb

a = Receive mode (Default: 0)

0 : Multi item buffer
1 : Single item buffer
b = ACK width: Valid range: 010 to 200 (1=50ns)

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>I10010
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES 1. It is not necessary to use this IEEE1284 <ESC>I1 command under normal conditions.
2. The set parameter by this command will become valid after rebooting.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-107 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SERIAL INTERFACE
FUNCTION Specifies the setting of the serial interface.

FORMAT <ESC>I2abcde

a = BAUD rate:
0 = 9600bps
1 = 19200bps
2 = 38400bps
3 = 57600bps

b = Data bit
0 = 8bit
1 = 7bit

c = Parity
0 = No parity
1 = Odd
2 = Even

d = Stop bit
0 = 1bit
1 = 2bit

e = Control
0 = READY/BUSY control (Single item buffer)
1 = READY/BUSY control (Multi item buffer)
2 = XON/XOFF
3 = Driver protocol
4 = Status 3

Place this command between <ESC>A start code and <Z> stop code..

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>I210003
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES The set parameter will become valid after rebooting.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-108 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

LAN INTERFACE
FUNCTION Specifies LAN Interface.

FORMAT <ESC>I3

a = LAN mode
0 : 2 port connection/unsolicited (for driver protocol)
1 : 2 port connection /solicited by ENQ (for driver protocol)
2 : 1 port connection /solicited by ENQ (STATUS3)

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>I30
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-109 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

EJECT AND CUT

FUNCTION Cuts any printed labels that remain in the printer..

FORMAT <ESC>NC (EJ)

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>NC (EJ)
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT

(1) Label stop position Cut position Print head

A: Printed
B: Not printed
C: Not printed A B C (1)
D: Not printed
(2)
(2) Command received
A B C D (3)
(3) Label is fed to the cut position.

(4) Label is cut off.

B C D (4)
(5) Label is back fed to the head position.

B C D (5)

Feed direction

NOTES 1. Valid only for cutter models.

2. This command is used to cut the last label remaining in the printer.
3. This command should be used by differentiating between Start code <ESC>A and Stop code
<ESC>Z.
4. This command <ESC>NC (EJ) may not be used in combination with other commands.
5. This command <ESC>NC (EJ) is valid while the printer is not working after having printed and
having finished the cutting operation.

Tip:
This command is used to cut remaining label in printer after the commands <ESC>CT0 or <ESC>~0 is
executed.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-110 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT METHOD, THERMAL/THERMAL TRANSFER

FUNCTION To set the printing method used for a job

FORMAT <ESC>PHa

a = 0: Thermal transfer printing

1: Direct thermal printing

Place in separate data stream sent to the printer.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>PH1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES When the power is cycled, the value set by this command is lost and replaced by the default value
stored in the EEPROM.
To change the value stored in the EEPROM, use the Printer Setting (<ESC>PC) command or use the
Printer Setting Utility program contained on the CD-ROM shipped with the printer.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-111 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT MODE SELECTION

FUNCTION To set the printing method used for a job

FORMAT <ESC>PMa

a = 0: Continuous
1: Tear-Off
7: Dispense, backfeed after print
8: Dispense, backfeed before print

Place in separate data stream sent to the printer.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>PM1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES When the power is cycled, the value set by this command is lost and replaced by the default value
stored in the EEPROM.
To change the value stored in the EEPROM, use the Printer Setting (<ESC>PC) command or use the
Printer Setting Utility program contained on the CD-ROM shipped with the printer.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-112 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

LINE FEED
FUNCTION To print multiple lines of the same character size without specifying a new print position for
each line.

FORMAT <ESC>Eaaa

aaa = Number of dots (001-999) between the bottom of the characters on

one line to the top of the characters on the next line.

Place preceding the text that will use the line feed function.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>E010<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0050<ESC>L0202<ESC>S
THIS IS THE 1ST LINE<CR>
THIS IS THE 2ND LINE<CR>
THIS IS THE 3RD LINE<CR>
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-60)

NOTES With the Line Feed (<ESC>E) command, specify the number of dots you want between each line.
Then, send an ASCII <ESC>CR at the end of each line of text. The printer automatically identifies the
size of the last character, moves down the number of dots specified, and begins printing the next line.
It is effective only for the current data stream.
When printing lines or boxes in the same data stream with the Line Feed command, the Lines and
Boxes command should be specified last, preceding Quantity (<ESC>Q) command.
This command is invalid only if the value specified is zero.
Following this command with a <ESC>CR character will allow printing with auto line feed. The print
position will be determined from the value specified and the H value set in the printer. If several “H”
values are specified after this command, the print position will be determined by the “H” value last
specified. The font to be used must be redefined after each “H” command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-113 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

USER DOWNLOAD
FUNCTION Allows the user to define custom Protocol Command codes.

FORMAT <ESC>LDa,

a = Replacement character for STX

b = Replacement character for ETX

c = Replacement character for ESC

d = Replacement character for ENQ

e = Replacement character for CAN

f = Replacement character for NUL

g = Replacement character for OFFLINE

h = Auto-Online. Printer powers up in the online mode.

0: Yes
1: No

i = Zero Slash. Places a slash through the “0” character.

0: Yes
1: No

j = Hexa-decimal character for Euro-character

Place immediately following <ESC>A within its own stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>LD,{,},%,#,&,*,~,0,0,D5
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT A Protocol Command code status label will be printed as a result of the successful download
of a custom set of Protocol Command codes.
(4-61)

NOTES Commas must be used to separate the parameters. If a parameter is omitted between two commas,
the default Non-Standard Protocol Command codes for that parameter will be used. If more or less
than 10 commas is included in the command, the entire command sequence will be ignored. If a
combination of characters are outside the hexadecimal range, the entire command sequence will be
ignored.
Downloading Auto Online and Zero Slash settings will overwrite the values selected using the LCD
panel. If these settings are changed using the LCD panel, they will overwrite any previously
downloaded settings.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 48 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-114 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

REPRINT CONFIGURATION
FUNCTION Specifies the configuration of reprinting.

FORMAT <ESC>RPa

a = 0: Normal (no print)

1: Reprint setting

Place immediately following <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>RP0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This function may also be set through the LCD and is not disclosed to users.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-115 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

LANGUAGE
FUNCTION Specifies the display language for the LCD.

FORMAT <ESC>LAa

a = Bar Code Symbol

0: English
1: French
2: German
3: Spanish
4: Italian
5: Portuguese

Place immediately following <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>LA0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This function may also be set through the LCD.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-116 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

CR/LF DELETION
FUNCTION Configures the deletion function of CR/LF.

FORMAT <ESC>CLa

a = 0: Normal (no deletion)

1: Delete CR/LF

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CL1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This function may be set through the LCD and is not disclosed to users.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-117 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

ZERO SLASH
FUNCTION To allow printing of numeric zeroes with a slash.

FORMAT <ESC>LHa

a = 0: Print zeroes without slash

1: Print zeroes with slash

Place in a separate data stream before any label data is transmitted.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>LH0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This command can also be set using the LCD panel. The last setting received, whether it is via this
command or manually input via the LCD panel will be active.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-118 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

ONLINE FEED
FUNCTION Enables label feeding when in the online mode.

FORMAT <ESC>LFa

a = 0: Enables label feed when online.

1: Disables label feed when online

Place in a separate command stream before label data is transmitted to the printer.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>LF0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT Feeds a blank label when entering the online mode.

NOTES This command can also be set using the LCD panel. The last setting received, whether it is via this
command or manually input via the LCD panel will be active.
The printer default setting can be set by user download.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-119 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

OPTION WAITING TIME

FUNCTION Specifies waiting time for option operations.

FORMAT <ESC>TWaaa

aaa = Waiting time for option operation =

Valid range: 005 to 200 (unit: 100 ms)

EXAMPLE Waiting time for option operation = 1.5 seconds

<ESC>A
<ESC>TW015
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This command specifies, in Tear-off mode, the waiting time between print completion and
Tear-off motion.

The set parameter becomes valid soon after receiving the command and will be retained
after power off.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-120 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

FORCED TEAR OFF

FUNCTION Executes Tear off compulsory.

FORMAT <ESC>TK

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>TK
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES 1. This command can be specified only in Tear off mode.

2. With this command, the printer executes Tear off motion without waiting the time set by command
<ESC>TW. If the next data is received before Tear off motion, Tear off is executed compulsory.
3. This command can not be used in combination with other commands.
Do not send this command in a row.

Tip:
This command can be used to save the time set by command <ESC>TW, if it is certain that there is no
following item.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-121 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

TEST PRINTING
FUNCTION Allows test labels to be printed via software control.

FORMAT <ESC>TPa

a = 0: Small User test print.

1: Large User test print
2: Small Factory test print
3: Large Factory test print

Place in a separate command stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>TP2
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT A small factory test label is printed.

NOTES A test print can also be initiated via the LCD panel.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-122 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

PRINT LENGTH, EXPANSION

FUNCTION To increase the maximum print length (in feed direction) for a label.

FORMAT <ESC>EX0 Sets the print length to maximum

<ESC>AR Resets the maximum print length to 7" (178 mm)

Must follow the Start Code command within it is own separate data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>EX0
<ESC>Z
<ESC>A
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V0100<ESC>WB1EXPAND TO:
<ESC>H0050<ESC>V2700<ESC>WB1MAX INCHES
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z
<ESC>A
<ESC>AR
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-62)

NOTES “EX0” is effective until “AR” is sent to reset the printer to its standard print length, or until the printer is
re-powered.
When this command is used with the Store Form Overlay (<ESC>&) command the form length cannot
exceed the maximum specified.
If a job contains elements out of the memory range, it is ignored.
If the Forms Overlay (<ESC>&) command is used with Expanded Memory to expand the print area, the
Form Overlay length is still limited to the maximum.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 49 and 50 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-123 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SHEET UNIT CUT QUANTITY

FUNCTION Specifies the sheet cut quantity for small labels. Only applicable to the M10e printer.

FORMAT <ESC>RCaa

a = Sheet cut quantity (01 to 99)

Place before quantity command and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>RI3200,1200,00,00,1600,0600,02,02
<ESC>A112003200
<ESC>RC01
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-63)

NOTES Sheet is a certain range specified under <ESC>A1 when it is divided into small labels under <ESC>R1.
The command <ESC>RC specifies the sheet cut quantity of small labels at the printer driver and
cannot be combined with other standard commands.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-124 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SHEET UNIT COPY QUANTITY

FUNCTION Specifies the quantity of copies of each sheet of small labels. Only applicable to the M10e
printer.

FORMAT <ESC>RWaa

a = Sheet copy quantity (01 to 99)

Place before quantity command and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>RI3200,1200,00,00,1600,0600,02,02
<ESC>A112003200
<ESC>RW01
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-64)

NOTES Sheet is a certain range specified under <ESC>R1 when it is divided into small labels under <ESC>A1.
The command <ESC>RW specifies the sheet copy quantity of small labels at the printer driver and
cannot be combined with other standard commands.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-125 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

IP ADDRESS SETUP
FUNCTION Specifies IP address setup method.

FORMAT <ESC>WIa

a = IP Address setup
0: Manual setup
1: DHCP

Place this command between <ESC>A start code and <ESC>Z stop code.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>WI1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

Setting can be printed on the factory test print.

NOTES You cannot use this command in combination with other commands.
The set parameter will become valid after rebooting.
Default setting of IP Address is as follows:
IP Address setup: 1 (DHCP)

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-126 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

RARP
FUNCTION Specifies if RARP is disabled or enabled. When enabled, RARP will automatically obtain IP
address in start up.

FORMAT <ESC>WM

a = RARP
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

Place this command between <ESC>A start code and <ESC>Z stop code.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>WM1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

Setting can be printed on the factory test print.

NOTES You cannot use this command in combination with other commands.
The set parameter will become valid after rebooting.
Default setting is as follows:
IP Address: 1 (RARP Enabled)

WIRELESS LAN
FUNCTION Sets up wireless LAN.

FORMAT <ESC>WZ

Format 1 To set up all items

<ESC>WZa,b,c,dddddddddddd,eeeeeeeeeeee,ffffffffffff,gggg,hhh,iii,j,k
,. . . . . zzzzzzzz

a = Item number:
F: All items
D: Default settings

b...z = Set value (as shown in the rows below)

Format 2 To set up specific items

<ESC>WZaa,b

a = Item number: Valid range: 1-25

b = Set value: See table below for more detail.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-127 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

WIRELESS LAN
FORMAT

Setting items

(*1) Alphanumeric or symbols. Except for [,] (comma) or [“] (double quotation).

(*2) ‘0’ to ‘9’, ‘A’ TO ‘F’

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-128 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

WIRELESS LAN
FORMAT Default settings

Notes:
1. Use the valid subnet address (=consistent with the IP address currently used) for the
default gateway.
2. WPA, WPA2 or Dynamic WEP cannot be used on Ad-hoc mode.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-129 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

WIRELESS LAN
EXAMPLE Example 1: Setting all items:
<ESC>A
<ESC>WZF,0,1,192168001002,255255255000,192168001001,????????
<ESC>Z

Example 2: Setting to default:

<ESC>A
<ESC>WZD
<ESC>Z

Example 3: Setting specific items:

<ESC>A
<ESC>WZ4,255255255000
<ESC>Z

Example 4: To specify 0 character in password authentication:

<ESC>A
<ESC>WZ24,
<ESC>Z

Notes:
This command can be used with type 1 (USB, Serial) only.
Place this command between start code <ESC>A and stop code <ESC>Z.
This command may not be used in combination with other commands.
Setting can be printed on the factory test print.
The set parameter will become valid after rebooting.
When you reset to default, the values of Default settings will be used.
All or some parameter entities is omissible by using commas. However, commas are not omissible.
When specifying item number 24 or 25, by omitting set value, 0 character setting will be available.

OUTPUT Setting can be printed on the factory test print.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-130 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

IP ADDRESS SETTING
FUNCTION Specifies IP address.

FORMAT <ESC>W1

a~a = IP address = 12 digits fixed

Place this command between <ESC>A start code and <ESC>Z stop code..

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>W1123220000040
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

Setting can be printed on the factory test print.

NOTES You cannot use this command in combination with other commands.
The set parameter will become valid after rebooting.
Default setting of IP address is as follows:
IP address: 000000000000

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-131 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

SUBNET MASK
FUNCTION Specifies Subnet mask.

FORMAT <ESC>W2a~a

a~a = Subnet mask = 12 digits fixed

Place this command between <ESC>A start code and <ESC>Z stop code.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>W2255255255000
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

Setting can be printed on the factory test print.

NOTES You cannot use this command in combination with other commands.
The set parameter will become valid after rebooting.
Default setting of Subnet mask is as follows:
Default gateway: 000000000000

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-132 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

DEFAULT GATEWAY
FUNCTION Specifies default gateway.

FORMAT <ESC>W3

a~a = Default gateway = 12 digits fixed

Place this command between <ESC>A start code and <ESC>Z stop code..

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>W3128220001001
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

Setting can be printed on the factory test print.

NOTES You cannot use this command in combination with other commands.
The set parameter will become valid after rebooting.
Default setting of Default gateway is as follows:
Default gateway: 000000000000

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-133 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

WORK-SHIFT PRINT INFORMATION

FUNCTION Specifies the printing of work shift information (shift name, start time, etc.). Only applicable to
the M8459/60/85/90Se printers.

FORMAT <ESC>WSa

a = Print content
1: Shift code
2: Printer use start time
3: Shift name

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>S
<ESC>V050<ESC>H050<ESC>L0101<ESC>MSHIFT CODE:
<ESC>V050<ESC>H300<ESC>L0202<ESC>WS1
<ESC>V100<ESC>H050<ESC>L0101<ESC>MSTART TIME:
<ESC>V100<ESC>H300<ESC>L0202<ESC>WS2
<ESC>WB0
<ESC>V150<ESC>H050<ESC>L0101<ESC>MSHIFT NAME:
<ESC>V150<ESC>H300<ESC>L0101<ESC>WS3
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-65)

SHIFT CODE: 1
START TIME: 12:02
SHIFT NAME: MORNING

NOTES If work shift information is set invalid at the printer’s LCD hidden settings mode, it will become a
command error.
Before the command <ESC>WS, character type to print the work shift information can be specified by
font command without any print data. If font specification command is not conducted, print it by using U
character.
The U, S, M, WB, WL, XU, XS, XM, XB, and XL are valid font types for specification.
The font specification command specifies the character type of <ESC>WS and becomes the default
value at the next item <ESC>A. The font specification comand for print data will not influence on the
print content of <ESC>WS.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-134 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

LABEL SPECIFICATION
FUNCTION Temporarily specifies label specification. Only applicable to the CT400/410 printers.

FORMAT <ESC>YEa

a = Label type
0: Adhesive label
1: Tag

Place immediately following the <ESC>A command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>YE0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES To change the setting value that is recorded in the printer, specify <ESC>PG or <ESC>PC commands.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-135 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

INTELLIGENT COMMANDS

BATCH SEPARATOR
FUNCTION To issue a tag with a special marking so that it can easily be divided on the stacker. Only
applicable to the XL400/410e printers.

FORMAT <ESC>Ia

a = Batch separator type

1: Divided mark type
2: Separator method

Place immediately following the <ESC>A command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>I1
<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>Q5
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-66)

NOTES When using the divided mark method and <ESC>Q is more than two pieces, place a black divided
mark on the edge of the first piece of label.
When using the separator method and the cut motion is available at the tag (center hold, horizontal
hole, angle R, eye-mark), the tag will be 12mm longer than normal length of the first piece of label and
the second tag wil be 12mm shorter than the first.
This command was formerly called the Divided Motion Specification in this document, prior to Version
E.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-136 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

GRAPHIC COMMANDS

GRAPHICS, CUSTOM
FUNCTION To create and print custom graphics (logos, pictures, etc.) on a label.

FORMAT <ESC>Gabbbccc(data)

a = Specifies format of data stream to follow B Binary format H

Hexadecimal format

bbb = Number of horizontal 8 x 8 blocks

ccc = Number of vertical 8 x 8 blocks

(data) = Hex data to describe the graphic image

Place anywhere within the data stream after the necessary position commands.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>GH006006
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFC00000000003
C00000000003C000FFFFFFF3C00080000013
C00080000013C0009FFFFF13C00080000013
C00080000013C0009FFFFF13C00080000013
C00080000013C000FFFFFFF3C00000000003
C00000000003C00000000003C00000000003
C00000000003C00000000003C00003C00003
C00007E00003C0000FF00003C0000FF00003
C0000FF00003C0000FF00003C00007E00003
C00003C00003C00003C00003C00003C00003
C00003C00003C00003C00003C00003C00003
C00003C00003C00003C00003C00003C00003
C00003C00003C00001800003C00000000003
C00000000003FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0100<ESC>XSPLEASE PLACE YOUR DISK
<ESC>H0300<ESC>V0150<ESC>XSIN A SAFE PLACE
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-67)

NOTES Graphic images may be printed along with other data to enhance label appearance or eliminate the
need for preprinted label stock. Using a dot-addressable matrix, design the graphic image in 8 x 8 dot
blocks, then send it in a binary format to the printer.
Do not use <ESC>CR or <ESC>LF characters as line delimiters within graphic data or the actual image
will not be printed as specified. A custom graphic cannot be enlarged by the Character Expansion
<ESC>L command and is not affected by either of the Rotation commands. Always design the graphic
image in the appropriate orientation.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 51 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-137 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

GRAPHICS, BMP FILE

FUNCTION To allow the creation and printing of graphic images using a BMP file format.

FORMAT <ESC>GMaaaaa,(data)

aaaaa = Number of bytes to be downloaded

Place anywhere within the job data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0100<ESC>GM03800,(...Data...)
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-68)

NOTES The maximum number of bytes that can be downloaded is 32K (compressed) and includes the BMP
header information. The maximum size of the uncompressed BMP file is 64K. If the uncompressed file
exceeds 64K, the graphic will not print.
Only black and white BMP files can be downloaded.
The file size specified by this command is the DOS file size in bytes.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-138 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

GRAPHICS, PCX FILE

FUNCTION To allow the creation and printing of graphic images using a PCX file format.

FORMAT <ESC>GPaaaaa,(data)

aaaaa = Number of bytes to be downloaded

Place anywhere within the job data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>V0150<ESC>H0100<ESC>GP03800,(...Data...)
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (4-69)

NOTES The maximum number of bytes that can be downloaded is 32K (compressed). The number specified by
this command includes the PCX header information. The maximum size of the uncompressed PCX file
is 64K. If the uncompressed file exceeds 64K, the graphic will not print.
Only black and white PCX files can be downloaded.
The file size specified by this command is the DOS file size in bytes.

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-139 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 4: Standard Command Codes

E/Pro Programming Reference 4-140 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

OPTIONAL
COMMAND CODES
• Calendar Commands
• Memory Card Commands

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-1 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

CALENDAR COMMANDS

CALENDAR PRINTING
FUNCTION Prints the date and/or time field from the printer’s internal clock.

FORMAT <ESC>WA(elements)

Elements = YYYY: 4 digit (1981 to 2080)

YY: 2 digit (00 to 91)
MM: Month (01 to 12) DD Day (01 to 31)
HH: 12 Hour clock (00 to 11)
hh: 24 Hour clock (00 to 23)
mm: Minute (00 to 59)
ss: Seconds (00 to 59)
TT: AM or PM
JJJ: Julian Date (001 to 366)
WW: Week (00 to 53)
ww: Week (01 to 54)

Place anywhere within the data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>XB1The current date is:
<ESC>XB1<ESC>WAMM/DD/YY
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0200<ESC>XB1The current time is:
<ESC>XB1<ESC>WAhh:mm
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES The date and time elements may be placed in any order for printing. Use slash (/) to separate date
elements and colon (:) to separate time elements. Up to 16 characters are allowed. The font must be
specified prior.
The printer’s internal clock may be set through the Calendar Set command. This command may be
used up to six times per job.
The Copy (<ESC>WD), Mirror Image (<ESC>RM) or Reverse Image (<ESC>/) commands cannot be
used with this command.
Century ranges are: for year = YY, any year equal to or greater than 80 and less than or equal to 99,
then the century equals 19 for year specified as YYYY=1999, and printed as <ESC>WAYY, will be
equal to 99.
The Julian date is the accumulated day from January 1st to the current date. The first day of the year is
January 1st (001) and the last day of the year is December 31st (365 or 366 for leap years).
The TT command should not be specified for printing in numeric only barcodes.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-2 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

CALENDAR INCREMENT
FUNCTION Prints the date and/or time field from the printer’s internal clock.

FORMAT <ESC>WPabbb

a = Y: Years
M: Months
W: Week number
D: Days
h: Hours

bbb = Numeric data

Years (0 to 9)
Months (01 to 99)
Weeks (00 to 99)
Days (001 to 999)
Hours (000 to 999)

Place anywhere within the data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>XB1Current Date:
<ESC>WAMM/DD/YY
<ESC>WPM06
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0200<ESC>XB1Expiration Date:
<ESC>WAMM/DD/YY
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-1)

NOTES Once the year increments past “99” it will wrap back to “00”. This command can only be used once per
data stream.
The printer’s internal clock may be set through the Calendar Set command.
If a print quantity of more than one label per job is used, the same time and date will be on each label of
the entire print job.
Calendar Increment Example: 1998 January 15 (ww=03) plus 48 weeks = week 51.
The Week Calendar specification follows ISO8601. Days of the week are numbered 1 through 7,
beginning with Monday. The first week of the year is the week containing the first Thursday. If January
1st falls on Friday, it belongs to the last week of the previous year. If December 31st falls on a
Wednesday, it belongs to the first week of the following year. If Calendar Increment calculation extends
over the year, the result belongs to the week number of the following year.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-3 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

CALENDAR CONFIGURATION
FUNCTION To set the time and date of the printer’s internal clock.

FORMAT <ESC>WTaabbccddee

aa = Year (00 to 99)

bb = Month (01 to 12)

cc = Day (01 to 31)

dd = Hour (00 to 23)

ee = Minute (00 to 59)

Place anywhere within the data stream.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>WT9312251300
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES Once the year increments past “99” it will wrap back to “00”. This command can only be used once per
data stream.
The printer’s internal clock may be set through the Calendar Set command.
If a print quantity of more than one label per job is used, the same time and date will be on each label
of the entire print job.
Calendar Increment Example: 1998 January 15 (ww=03) plus 48 weeks = week 51.
The Week Calendar specification follows ISO8601. Days of the week are numbered 1 through 7,
beginning with Monday. The first week of the year is the week containing the first Thursday. If January
1st falls on Friday, it belongs to the last week of the previous year. If December 31st falls on a
Wednesday, it belongs to the first week of the following year. If Calendar Increment calculation extends
over the year, the result belongs to the week number of the following year.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-4 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

MEMORY CARD COMMANDS

CARD SLOT FOR USE

FUNCTION Specifies the card slot for use.

FORMAT <ESC>CCa

a = 0: Internal (1 fixed)
1: Memory Area 1
2: Memory Area 2

Place immediately following <ESC>A.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES Specify this command for memory card function. When the card is not inserted, a card error will occur.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-5 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

CARD FORMAT
FUNCTION Specifies the format (initialization) of memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>BJFa

a = User ID (up to 8 bytes of alphanumerics and symbols)

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>BJFsatocard
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This command is not valid without an optional memory card.

Specify the Card Slot for Use <CC> prior to using this command.
This command is for formatting a memory card and cannot be used in combination with other
commands. If formatting the card by accident, registered data will be erased.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-6 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

MEMORY CARD CLEAR

FUNCTION Clears the entire contents in the optional memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>*a,

a = Item to be cleared
G: SATO Graphic
P: PCX File
M: BMP File
F: Format
O: True Type Font
R: Form Overlay

b = Registration number
000 to 999 True Type Font
001 to 999 Except True Type Font

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>*0,09
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES Specify the Card Slot for Use <CC> prior to using this command.
To clear all data of the memory card, use Card Format <BJF>.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-7 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

SYSTEM CLEAR
FUNCTION Clears the specific system contents.

FORMAT <ESC>*a

a = Item to be cleared
None: 1 item reception buffer, edit buffer (cannot reprint)
T: Foreign character register area
&: Form overlay
X: All clear

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>*T
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES All data sent prior to <ESC>*X will be cleared, but end data will not be cleared during printing.
If this comand is used, send the next data after 100 milliseconds has transpired.
Print motion will not stop if it is specified during print motion.
If just * is set, all jobs will be cleared.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-8 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

PRINT MEMORY CARD STATUS

FUNCTION Prints the status of memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>BJS

Place immediately following <ESC>CC#.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>BJS
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-2)

NOTES This command is for printing the memory card status and cannot be used in combination with other
commands. The status can be chaecked with the label of W68mm and H90mm.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-9 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

TRUE TYPE FONT, RECALL

FUNCTION Specifies to invoke True Type Font.

FORMAT <ESC>BJRabbccddeeffffgg...g

<ESC>BJT,aa,bb,cc,dd,ee,ffff,gg...g

a = Font ID (0 to 9)

b = Horizontal magnification (01 to 12)

c = Vertical Magnification (01 to 12)

d = Character Pitch (01 to 99)

e = Backup (00 fixed)

f = Print Character Quantity (0000 to 9999)

g = Data

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>BJR1010101000010SATO
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-3)

NOTES This command is not valid without an optional memory card. Specify the Card Slot for Use <CC> prior
to using this command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-10 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

TRUE TYPE FONT, STORE

FUNCTION Specifies the storageTrue Type Font.

FORMAT Begin download <ESC>BJ(aa...abb..b

Download <ESC>BJDcccccddddee...e

End download <ESC>BJ

a = Font Description (specification of 40 bytes of font)

b = Date (10 bytes of date data)

c = Memory Offset (5 bytes of memory offset in hex)

d = Quantity of Data bytes (0001 to 2000)

e = Font data to download (0001 to 2000)

Place anywhere between <ESC>A and <ESC>Z.

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES This command is not valid without an optional memory card. Specify the Card Slot for Use <CC> prior
to using this command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-11 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

FORMAT/FIELD, RECALL
FUNCTION To recall a field from a stored format and place new data in the field.

FORMAT <ESC>YR,aa<ESC>/D,bb,cc....c

aa = Format number to be recalled (01 to 99)

bb = Field number to be recalled (01 to 99)

cc...c = Data to placed in the recalled field

Place immediately following the <ESC>CC Slot Select command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>YR,02<ESC>/D,01,TWO FIELDS OF <ESC>/D,02,VARIABLE DATA
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-4)

NOTES This command requires the Expanded Memory option.

Only one format can be recalled at a time. However, multiple fields can be recalled from the same
format.
The number of data characters contained in the “cc...c” field cannot exceed the value designated in the
<ESC>/N Field Store command. If it does, the data will be truncated to fit the field length defined in the
store command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-12 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

FORMAT/FIELD, STORE
FUNCTION To store a format field description in the memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>YS,aa<ESC>/N,bb,cc....c

aa = Format number to be stored(01 to 99)

bb = Field number to be stored (01 to 99)

cc...c = Field length to be stored (01 to 99)

Place immediately following the <ESC>CC Memory Area Select command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>YS,02<ESC>/N,01,13<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0100<ESC>XB1
<ESC>/N,02,13<ESC>V0200<ESC>H0200<ESC>XB1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT There is no printer output as a result of this command. See <ESC>YR Format/Field Recall command.

NOTES This command requires the Expanded Memory option.

When storing multiple formats, enter <ESC>A and <ESC>Z with one format.
Specify the Card Slot fo Use <ESC>CC prior to using this command.
Use Field Store <ESC>/N in conjunction with this command.
Attempts to store using a predefined field number will result in an error and the targeted content will be
printed.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 52 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-13 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

FORM OVERLAY, RECALL

FUNCTION To recall the label image from stored in the Expanded Memory.

FORMAT <ESC>&R,aa

aa = Storage number (01 to 99)

Place immediately following the <ESC>CC Memory Area Select command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>&R,01
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES The Expanded Memory option is required fro this command.

The <ESC>CC Memory Area Select command must be sent prior to this command.
Several images stored under different storage numbers can be printed with this command. The storage
number must be speciifed.
A read/write error will occur if an unused storage number is specified.
The label image can be moved by using the <ESC>V and <ESC>H commands when it is stored along
with a window size. If it exceeds the printable area by being moved, the label image will be trancated.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-14 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

FORM OVERLAY, STORE

FUNCTION To store fixed print contents to the memory card.

FORMAT <ESC>&S,aa,bbbb,cccc

aa = Store number (01 to 99)

bbbb = Horizontal size of window (50 to H max)

cccc = Vertical size of window (50 to V max)

Place immediately following the <ESC>CC Memory Area Select command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>&S,01
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in printer output.

NOTES The Memory Area Select (<ESC>CC) command must be sent prior to this command.
The label image must be divided from other label images by the <ESC>A and <ESC>Z bounding
commands.
The parameters of “bbbb” and “cccc” may be omitted. By specifying them, the label image can be
moved by using the <ESC>V and <ESC>H position commands when recalling the label image. If the
repositioned label image exceeds beyond the printable area, the image wil be truncated. If an
<ESC>A1 Media Size command has been sent to the printer, the maximum size that can be stored is
the size of the label defined in the command.
A label image cannot be stored in a location that already contains data. Graphics, PCX and BMP files
can be stored but their combined size cannot exceed memory.
The forms stored by this command are cleared by the <ESC>*R command.
Refer to Appendix: Table 53 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-15 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

FORM OVERLAY, STORE

Example A: Normal Operation
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H100<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202
<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>V60<ESC>H60
<ESC>FW0808V800H400
<ESC>V320<ESC>H60
<ESC>FW04H400
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>&S1
<ESC>Z
Example B: When window size is specified
<ESC>A
<ESC>A1800400
<ESC><ESC>V100<ESC>H00<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202
<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>&S, 1, 20, 200
<ESC>Z
Example C: When print is specified after <ESC>&S
<ESC>A
<ESC>V100<ESC>H100<ESC>P2<ESC>L0202
<ESC>XMABCD
<ESC>V60<ESC>H60
<ESC>FW0808V800H400
<ESC>V320<ESC>H60
<ESC>FW04H400
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>&S1
<ESC>V200<ESC>H100<ESC>OB12345
<ESC>Z

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-16 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

BMP FILE, RECALL

FUNCTION To recall a previously stored BMP file stored in Expanded Memory.

FORMAT <ESC>GCaaa

aaa = Storage number (001 to 999)

Place after the CC Memory Area Select command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1<ESC>V100<ESC>H100
<ESC>GC001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-6)

NOTES The <ESC>CC Memory Area Select command must be sent before this command.
The printed image can be expanded or rotated.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-17 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

BMP FILE, STORE

FUNCTION To store for printing a graphic file in a BMP format in the optional Expanded Memory.

FORMAT <ESC>GTaaa,bbbbb,nn...n

aaa = Storage number (001 to 999)

bbbbb = Size of BMP file in bytes

nn..n+ = Data

Place within its own data stream specifying the placement of the graphic.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1<ESC>GT001, 12345, nn...n
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT There is no printer output as a result of this command.

NOTES This command requires the Expanded Memory Option. See your SATO representative for details.
Data must be sent in binary format.
The Memory Area Select Command <ESC>CCa must be sent before this command.
The first 62 bytes of the stored file is used for the header and the remainder is the BMP image data.
The graphic will not be printed correctly if the specified size does not match the actual graphic size.
Only black and white non-compressed BMP files can be stored. Color BMP files will cause an error.
If you try to store an image in a memory area that already contains data, an error will occur.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-18 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

PCX FILE, RECALL

FUNCTION To recall for printing a graphic file previously stored in a PCX format in the Memory Card.

FORMAT <ESC>PYaaa

aaa = Storage number (001 to 999)

This command must be placed within its own data stream specifying the placement of the graphic.

EXAMPLE Normal Rotation

<ESC>A<ESC>CC1
<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0050<ESC>PY001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z
Rotate Base Reference Point
<ESC>A<ESC>CC1<ESC>%1
<ESC>V0330<ESC>H0160<ESC>PY001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z
2nd Rotation, Base Reference Point
<ESC>A<ESC>CC1<ESC>%2
<ESC>V0330<ESC>H0600<ESC>PY001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z
3rd Rotation, Base Reference Point
<ESC>A<ESC>CC1<ESC>%3
<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0800<ESC>PY001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-7)

NOTES This command requires Expanded Memory option. See your SATO representative for details. See the
<ESC>PI Store PCX Graphics command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-19 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

PCX FILE, STORE

FUNCTION To store for later printing a PCX graphic file in the Expanded Memory.

FORMAT <ESC>PIaaa,bbbbb,{data}

aaa = Storage number (001 to 999)

bbbbb = Size of PCX File in bytes.

{data} = Data

Place within its own data stream.

EXAMPLE BASIC Program to download a PCX file to Expanded Memory Area 1, Storage Area 1
OPEN .C:\WIZARD\GRAPHICS\LION.PCX. FOR INPUT AS #2
DA$ = INPUT$(3800,#2)
C$ = CHR$(27)
WIDTH .LPT1:.,255
LPRINT C$;"A";C$;"CC1";
LPRINT C$; .PI001,03800,.;DA$
LPRINT C$;"Z";
CLOSE #2

OUTPUT There is no printer output as a result of this command. See <ESC>PY PCX Graphics Recall command.

NOTES This command requires Expanded Memory option. See your SATO representative for details.
Graphics cannot be stored as part of a format.
Only black and white PCX files can be stored.
The file size specified by this command is the DOS file size in bytes.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-20 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

CUSTOM GRAPHICS, RECALL

FUNCTION Use the Recall command any time you want to print a graphic image on a label along with other printed
data.

FORMAT <ESC>GRaaa

aaa = Storage number (001 to 999)

The Recall command is sent in a secondary data stream to print the graphic, and follows any
necessary position or size commands.

EXAMPLE Non Rotated Graphic

<ESC>A<ESC>CC1
<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0080<ESC>L0505
<ESC>GR001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z
Graphic Rotated 90°
<ESC>A<ESC>CC1<ESC>%1
<ESC>V0180<ESC>H0250<ESC>L0505
<ESC>GR001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z
Graphic Rotated 180°
<ESC>A<ESC>CC1<ESC>%1
<ESC>V0180<ESC>H0500<ESC>L0505
<ESC>GR001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z
Graphic Rotated 270°
<ESC>A<ESC>CC1<ESC>%3
<ESC>V0100<ESC>H0600<ESC>L0505
<ESC>GR001
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-8)

NOTES The graphic image to be stored cannot be rotated before it is stored. It can be rotated when it is
recalled.
Graphic images cannot be stored as part of a label format.
See the <ESC>GI Custom Graphic Store command.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-21 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

CUSTOM GRAPHICS, STORE

FUNCTION To provide similar functionality to the <ESC>G Custom Graphic command, but allows for the graphic
image to be stored in Expanded Memory. Use the Store command to send the graphic data to the
printer’s optional Expanded Memory.

FORMAT <ESC>GIabbbcccddd{data}

aaa = Specifies character format of the data

H: Hex data
B: Binary data

bbb = Quantity of horizontal 8 x 8 blocks

ccc = Quantity of vertical 8 x 8 blocks

ddd = Graphics storage quantity (001-099)

{data} = Hex or binary data to describe the graphic image

Immediately following the <ESC>CC Memory Area Select command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>GIH0020020010100038007C00FE01FF03FF87FFCFFFE07C007C007C007C007C007C007C
007C0
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT There is no printer output as a result of this command. See <ESC>GR Recall Custom Graphics
command.

NOTES Expanded Memory is required to use this command. Its maximum storage capacity is 999 graphics or
up to the capacity of the memory card used.
If a data transmission error occurs, the printer will beep, the ERROR LED will illuminate, and the image
must be transmitted again.
Each graphic to be stored must be sent in its own data stream.
Example of correct data stream:
<ESC>A
<ESC>GIHaaabbb001(DATA)
<ESC>Z
<ESC>A
<ESC>GIHaaabbb002(DATA)
<ESC>Z
Example of incorrect data stream:
<ESC>A
<ESC>GIHaaabbb001(DATA)
<ESC>GIHaaabbb002(DATA)
<ESC>Z
Do not use ASCII <CR> or <LF> characters (carriage return or line feed) as line delimiters within the
graphic data or the actual image will not be printed as specified.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 54 for additional information.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-22 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

CHARACTER, CUSTOM DESIGNED

FUNCTION To allow for the creation, storage, and printing of custom characters, such as special fonts or logos. Up
to 50 individual characters may be stored in the custom character volatile memory.

FORMAT Store Command: <ESC>Tabcc

Recall Command: <ESC>Kab90cc

a = 1 16x16 matrix
2 24x24 matrix

b = Specifies the character encoding method for the data stream

H Hexadecimal characters
B Binary characters

cc = Memory location to store/recall the character. Valid memory locations are 21

to 52 (counting in Hex) or “!” or “R” in Binary.

(data) = Data to describe the character

The Store command is typically sent in its own data stream to the printer, between the Start/Stop
commands. The Recall command is sent in a secondary data stream to print the character, and follows
any necessary position or size commands.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>T1H3F0100038007C00FE01FF03FF87FFCFFFE07C007C007C007C007C00<ESC>Z

<ESC>A <ESC>H150<ESC>V100<ESC>L0505<ESC>K1H903F
<ESC>H350<ESC>V100<ESC>L1010<E SC>K1H903F <ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-9)

NOTES When printing the custom character using the Recall command, the character is affected by the
following commands: Character Expansion Character Pitch Line Feed Rotate, Fixed Base Reference
Point
The characters are stored in volatile memory and must be reloaded if the printer power is lost.
Do not use ASCII <CR> or <LF> characters (carriage return or line feed) as line delimiters within the
graphic data or the actual image will not be printed as specified.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-23 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

FIELD PRINT SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION To cal out items which are registered at the Field Register Specification <ESC>/N and then specify the
data.

FORMAT <ESC>/D,aa,n...n

a = Field number (01 to 99)

n = Data

Place following the <ESC>YR command.

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>YR,02<ESC>/D,01,TWO FIELDS OF<ESC>/D,02,VARIABLE DATA
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT (5-10)

NOTES The print digit number is valid at the specified range of <ESC>/N.
If the digit number specified at <ESC>/D is much more than that from <ESC>/N, the specified print digit
is valid for printing.
Use as a apair with the command <ESC>YR.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-24 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

FIELD REGISTER SPECIFICATION

FUNCTION To register the item inside of the field at the Format Register Specification <ESC>/N.

FORMAT <ESC>/N,aa,n...n

a = Field number (1 to 99)

n = Print digit number (1 to 99)

EXAMPLE <ESC>A
<ESC>CC1
<ESC>YS,01
<ESC>/N,1,3
<ESC>%0<ESC>V100<ESC>H200<ESC>P2<ESC>L0101<ESC>XMABC
<ESC>/N,2,5
<ESC>%0<ESC>V300<ESC>H40<ESC>B40208049123456
<ESC>Z

OUTPUT This command does not result in output. Refer to <ESC>YR Format/Field Recall command.

NOTES Specify the field number with the order start from the small value.
Print Vertical Position Specification <ESC>V and Print Horizontal Position Specification <ESC>H shall
be specified at every field. It will become default value if none of the specification is made.
When specifying foreign characters using foreign character code <ESC>H, a foreign character needs
four digits (three foreign characters equals twelve digits).
When specifying foreign characters using foreign character code <ESC>B, a foreign character needs
two digits (three foreign characters equals six digits).
Specify the register digit numbers of fixed field out of value 00.
Use this command as a pair with Format Register Specification <ESC>YS.
Due to memory limitations, it may not be able to 99 items.

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-25 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 5: Optional Command Codes

E/Pro Programming Reference 5-26 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

BI-DIRECTIONAL
COMMUNICATIONS
• Introduction
• Enquire & Response

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-1 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

INTRODUCTION
Bi-Directional communications is a two-way communications protocol between the host and the printer enabling
the host to monitor and control the printer’s operational status. The Bi-Com 5 protocol only works in the Multi-Job
Buffer mode.

GENERAL CONFIGURATION
Refer to Appendix: Reference Table 40 for printer configuration commands.

SERIAL INTERFACE
For this protocol to function properly with an RS232C Interface, pin 6 (DTR) and pin 5 (CTS) must be held high by
the host. To ensure these pins are always in the correct state is to tie pin 20 (DTR) to pin 6 (DSR) and pin 4 (RTS)
to pin 5 (CTS) at the printer end on the cable.

RECEIVE BUFFER
This protocol controls information such as reception, print, and cancelation for every item. When the buffer is near
full, an error will occur informing the host that either there is not enough memory remaining or that the item quantity
has been exhausted.
To release the receive buffer one of those conditions must be remedied.

DATA TRANSMISSION
Data transmissions must be preceded with STX (HEX 02H) and be followed by ETX (HEX 03H) to function.The
string must also include the item number or an error will occur. An error will also occur if an incorrect item number
is identiifed. BCC must follow <ESC>Z if the BCC function is enabled.

Print Data
<STX><ESC>A<ESC>{ID 00000}{Print Data}<ESC>Z<ESC>BCC<ETX>

Status Request
<STX>SOH{ENQ}00000<ETX>

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-2 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

ENQUIRE & RESPONSE

ENQUIRE (ENQ)
Upon receipt of an ENQ command, the printer responds with status information bounded by an STX/ETX pair. The
status information is defined as follows:

<STX>{ # Byte ID }{ # Status Byte }{ # Byte Label Remaining }{ # Byte Job Name }<ETX>

ID Identifies the current print job ID. Is defined using the Job ID (<ESC>ID)
command transmitted with the print job. (2 bytes)
Status Defines the current status of the printer. (1 byte)
Label Remaining Defines the quantity of labels remaining in the current print job. 6 bytes)
Job Name ASCII characters identify the assigned job name by the Job Name
(<ESC>WK) command. If the name is less than the required characters, the
field will be padded with zeroes. (16 bytes)

If an ENQ is received after the print job specified in the ID bytes has been completed, or the buffer is empty of data,
the printer will respond with “space” characters for the ID number (Remaining Labels & Job Name bytes).
The host computer transmits an ENQ to the printer which responds within five milliseconds unless actively printing.
If printing, it will respond upon finishing and then resume printing.
Refer to Appendix: Reference Tables 41 and 42 for additional information.

RETURN STATUS BYTES & FORMAT

1 5 2 5 2 6 1
Item Number in Item Status in Issues of Item in
STX Item Number Item Status ETX
Process Process Process

CANCEL (CAN)
If a CAN command is received, it will stop the print job and clear all data from the buffers. A delay of five
milliseconds is required before any new data may be downloaded. The CAN command is effective upon receipt,
even if the printer is offline or in an error condition. The printer will return an ACK if the printer is not in an error
condition and a NAK if an error condition exists.

PRINT JOB
Upon receipt of a valid print job (<ESC>A....<ESC>Z), an ACK will be returned by the printer if an error condition
does not exist and a NAK if an error condition exists. (Only for RS232 Interface)

PRINT STOP (DLE)

This command stops the printing process. Execution should be avoided while sending print or other data. If an
error condition occurs, a NAK is returned and an ACK is returned if one does not.

PRINT START (DC1)

This command enables the printer to exit the pause mode (DLE) by the request command to resume printing
(DC1). The host also sends an ENQ command to confirm execution. Execution should be avoided while sending
print or other data. Upon receipt of this command, an ACK is returned if an error condition does not exist and a
NAK if one does.

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-3 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

OBTAIN HISTORY DATA (LW)

This command enables the printer to send 500-items at a time of CR/LF history data to the host. Avoid any
transmission to the printer while history data is being sent to the host. Also avoid the inclusion and use of this
command in the print data.
When the Item Number command is not in the receive data, or the command is incorrect, the item number is saved
as “*****” and the status as “3” in the history. The Item Number Error may occur at the beginning of print operation
and cease operation.

HISTORY DATA

ITEM DESRCIPTION BYTES

1 Management Flag 1

2 Item Number 5

3 Status 00: Received 2

01: Issued
02: Cancel
03: Item Number Error
04: BCC Error
05: Designation of Print after Occurance
06: Cancel after Error Occurance
07: Analyzing Unprinted Items
08: Unprocessed Error due to Power Removal

RETURN HISTORY DATA BYTES & FORMAT

1 5 2 2 5 2 1
STX Item Number Item Status CR/LF Item Number Item status ETX

RELEASE RETURN ERROR (SUB)

This command enables the printer to release from an error and resume printing of the item where the error
occurred. The host also sends an ENQ command to confirm execution. Avoid the inclusion and use of this
command in the print data.

PRINTER STATUS (MG)

Receipt of SOH followed by MG causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the current operating status of the printer.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1 Printer Type 00: Thermal Transfer
01: Direct Thermal

2 Print Resolution (dots per inch) 00: 203

01: 305

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-4 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

3 Print Speed (inches per second) 00: 2
01: 3
02: 4
03: 5
04: 6
05: 7
06: 8
07: 9
08: 10
09: 12

4 Mode 00: Not Supported

01: Not Supported
02: Not Supported
03: Label Dispense Print Mode
04: Reserved

5 Not Supported 00: Reserved

01: Reserved
02: Reserved

6 Dispense Position 00: At Print Head Position

01: At Dispense Position

7 Not Supported 00: Reserved

8 Not Supported 41: Reserved

42: Reserved
43: Reserved

9 Print Density 00: Level 1

01: Level 2
02: Level 3
03: Level 4
04: Level 5

10 Sensor Type 00: Reflective (Eye-Mark)

01: Gap (See-Thru)
02: None

11 Zero Slash 00: Disabled

01: Enabled

12 Not Supported 00: Reserved

13 Not Supported 00: Reserved

01: Reserved

14 Online Feed 00: Disabled

01: Enabled

15 Pitch 00: Fixed

01: Proportional

16-17 HEX: 00 to C80

Not Supported
HEX: 00 to 12C

18-19 HEX: 00 to 340

Not Supported
HEX: 00 to 4E0

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-5 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

20-21 HEX: 00 to 3E7 Vertical Base Reference Point Offset (0 to 792 dots)
HEX: FFFF to FC19 Vertical Base Reference Point Offset (-1 to -792 dots)

22-23 HEX: 00 to 320 Horizontal Base Reference Point Offset (0 to 800 dots)
HEX: 00 to FCE0 Horizontal Base Reference Point Offset (-1 to -800 dots)

24 HEX: 00 to 63
Not Supported
HEX: FF to 9D

25 HEX: 00 to 63
Not Supported
HEX: FF to 9D

26 HEX: 00 to 63
Not Supported
HEX: FF to 9D

27 HEX: 00 to 63 Dispense Offset (0 to 99 dots)

HEX: FF to 9D Dispense Offset (-1 to -99 dots)

28 Compatibility Mode 00: Enabled

01: Disabled

29 08 to 40 Not Supported

30 Buzzer 00: Enabled

01: Disabled

COUNTER STATUS (ME)

Receipt of SOH followed by ME causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the operating status of the printer’s life counters.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1-8 HEX Current Life Counter in dots

9-12 HEX 1st (Current) Head Counter in dots

13-16 HEX 2nd (Previous) Head Counter in dots

17-20 HEX 3rd Head Counter in dots

21-24 HEX Not Supported

25-28 HEX Not Supported

SENSOR STATUS (SG)

Receipt of SOH followed by SG causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the current operating status of the printer’s sensors.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1 HEX Reflective Sensor Level

2 HEX Transmissive Sensor Level

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-6 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

3 00H Out of Paper
01H Paper Present

4 00H Head Open

01H Head Closed

HEAD STATUS (HC)

Receipt of SOH followed by HC causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the current operating status of the print head.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1 00 HEX Print Head OK
01 HEX Electrical Fault in Print Head

SYSTEM VERSION INFORMATION (SB)

Receipt of SOH followed by SB causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the system version of the printer.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1-50 ASCII Firmware Version Information

MEMORY STATUS (EB)

Receipt of SOH followed by EB causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the current user memory allocation.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1-4 HEX Free Font Memory

5-8 HEX Total Font Memory

9-12 HEX Free Form Overlay Memory

13-16 HEX Total Form Overlay Memory

17-20 HEX Free Graphic Memory

21-24 HEX Total Graphic Memory

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-7 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

FORM OVERLAY STATUS (FO)

Receipt of SOH followed by FO causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the forms downloaded into the printer.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1-2 01 to 99 Form Registration Number

3-18 ASCII Form Name

FONT CONFIGURATION (FG)

Receipt of SOH followed by FG causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
information on the stored font or graphic.

PARAMETERS

BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION BYTE VALUE DESCRIPTION

1-2 ASCII Font ID Number 76 HEX Family Attribute

3-4 00H 01H Font Graphic 77 HEX Character set

5-36 ASCII Font Name 78 HEX Italic Attribute

37-48 ASCII Font Style 79-80 HEX Weight Attribute

49-52 ASCII Font Point Size 81-82 HEX Spread

53-54 HEX Character Width (dots) 83-84 HEX Assent in Dots

54-60 HEX Character Height (dots) 85-86 HEX Registration Start Code

57-60 HEX Font size 86-87 HEX Registration End Code

58-64 HEX Font Registration Number 88-95 HEX Reserved

65-68 HEX Font Data Top Address 96-98 HEX Code

69-72 HEX Total size 99-100 HEX Horizontal Valid size

73-74 HEX Vertical/Horizontal Writing Flag 101-102 HEX Left Gap Size

75 HEX Character Pitch (fixed/variable)

INTERFACE STATUS (IG)

Receipt of SOH followed by IG causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the type of interface connection currently set.

PARAMETERS

1 Interface Type 0: IEEE1284 Parallel

1: RS232 Serial
2: Local Area Network (LAN)
3: Universal Serial Bus (USB)

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-8 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

INTERFACE SETTINGS (H2)

Receipt of SOH followed by H2 causes the printer to return information bounded by an STX-ETX pair that reports
the current operating parameters of the interface.

PARAMETERS

1 Bytes Per Second 0: 9600

1: 19200
2: 38400
3: 57600

2 Parity 0: None
1: Odd
2: Even

3 Stop Bits 0: 1
1: 2

4 Communication 0: Singl-Item Buffer with Ready/Busy Flow Control

1: Multi-Item Buffer with ReadBusy Flow Control
2: X-On/X-Off Flow Control
3: Status4 Bi-Comm
4: Status3 Bi-Comm

ITEM NUMBER CHECK

The printer checks the item number of received print data whether the number is increasing one (1) to every item.
If an error is detected, the printer activates “ITEM NUMBER ERROR” at the beginning of that item’s print operation
ceases printing. The item number error can only be detected if the Check of Item Number is enabled. In addition to
various printer keypad functions, a BCC error is released by either sending a SUB command or a CAN command.
Specify the item number starting from “00000” after powering on the printer. Note that print data is the subject of
the check of item number and that error detection is not performed for the data that does not accompany print
operation - such as registered data and printer setup command. For such data, specify “*****” for its item number.
When specifying the item number with <ESC>IQ, the command for the designation of Start Item Number, the start
number for the next data becomes the item number specified in <ESC>IQ.

STATUS BYTE DEFINITION (BI-COM PROTOCOL)

ASCII HEX DEFINITION

ONLINE
0 30 No Errors

1 31 Ribbon Near End

2 32 Buffer Near Full

3 33 Ribbon Near End and Buffer Near Full

4(1) 34 Print Stop (without error)

ONLINE, WAITING FOR DATA

A 41 No Errors

B 42 Ribbon Near End

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-9 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 6: Bi-Directional Communications

ASCII HEX DEFINITION

C 43 Buffer Near Full

D 44 Ribbon Near End and Buffer Near Full

E(1) 45 Print Stop (without error)

ONLINE PRINTING
G 47 No Errors

H 48 Ribbon Near End

I 49 Buffer Near Full

J 4A Ribbon Near End and Buffer Near Full

K(1) 4B Print Stop (without error)

ONLINE, WAITING TO DISPENSE A LABEL

M 4D No Errors

N 4E Ribbon Near End

O 4F Buffer Near Full

P 50 Ribbon Near End and Buffer Near Full

Q(1) 51 Print Stop (without error)

ONLINE, COMPILING PRINT JOB

S 53 No Errors

T 54 Ribbon Near End

U 55 Buffer Near Full

V(1) 56 Ribbon Near End and Buffer Near Full

W(1) 57 Print Stop (without error)

OFFLINE, ERROR CONDITION

b 62 Head Open

c 63 Paper End

d 64 Ribbon End

e 65 Media Error

f 66 Sensor Error

g 67 Head Error

j 6A Cutter Error

k 6B Other Errors

(1) Not supported by legacy Bi-Comm protocols.

E/Pro Programming Reference 6-10 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

APPENDIX
• Custom Characters/Graphics
• Custom Protocol Codes
• Reference Tables
• Glossary

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-1 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

CUSTOM CHARACTERS/GRAPHICS

CUSTOM DESIGNED CHARACTER EXAMPLE

The following example is presented to help understand the use of the Custom Designed Characters command. It
demonstrates the design and printing of an “arrow” in a 16 x 16 matrix.
1. Determine which matrix size to use
• 16 dot x 16 dots
• 24 dots by 24 dots
2. Lay out a grid and draw the image on the grid.
• Each square represents one dot
• Blacken squares for each printed dot
(7a)

3. Transfer the image into two bit map representations and then into hexadecimal or binary format.

ROW BIT MAP HEX

1 0000 0001 0000 0000 01 00

2 0000 0011 1000 0000 03 80

3 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

4 0000 1111 1110 0000 0F E0

5 0001 1111 1111 0000 1F F0

6 0011 1111 1111 1000 3F F8

7 0111 1111 1111 1100 7F FC

8 1111 1111 1111 1110 FF FE

9 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

10 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

11 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

12 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

13 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

14 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

15 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

16 0000 0111 1100 0000 07 C0

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-2 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

4. To store the custom designed character in memory using a hexadecimal data stream:

<ESC>A
<ESC>T1H3F0100038007C00FE01FF03FF87FFCFFFE07C007C007C007C007C007C007C007C0
<ESC>Z

5. To recall a custom character from memory, send the following code to the printer. Note the character size was
expanded using the <ESC>L command. Other data can also be printed.

<ESC>A
<ESC>L0505<ESC>H0150<ESC>V100<ESC>K1H903F
<ESC>L0505<ESC>H0600<ESC>V100<ESC>K1H903F
<ESC>L0303<ESC>H0125<ESC>V0250<ESC>MTHIS SIDE UP !
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

6. To store the custom designed character in memory using a binary data stream:

<ESC>A
<ESC>T1B3F 01H 00H 03H 80H 07H C0H 0FH E0H 1FH F0H 3FH F8H 7FH FCH FFH FEH 07H
C0H 07H
C0H 07H C0H 07H C0H 07H C0H 07H C0H 07H C0H 07H C0H
<ESC>Z

NOTE: The data stream is only half as long as the hexadecimal format because
sending the binary equivalent of “11111111” (represented above in its hexidecimal
value of FFH), for example, using one eight bit word while it takes two eight bit words
to transmit the hexadecimal equivalent “F” and “F”. To send binary characters using
BASIC, the expression ìCHR (&HFF) will send the binary equivalent of FF (i.e.,
11111111).

7. To recall the custom character from memory, send the following code to the printer:

<ESC>A
<ESC>L505<ESC>H0150<ESC>V100<ESC>K1B903F
<ESC>L505<ESC>H0600<ESC>V100<ESC>K1B903F
<ESC>L0303<ESC>H0125<ESC>V0250<ESC>XMTHISSIDE UP !
<ESC>Q1
<ESC>Z

The printer output for both the hexadecimal and binary format examples is.
(7b)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-3 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

CUSTOM GRAPHICS EXAMPLE

The following example is presented to help you understand the use of the Custom Graphics command. It
demonstrates the design and printing of a diskette in a 48 x 48 matrix.
1. Determine the matrix size for the graphic. It must be in 8 dot by 8 dot blocks. The example here has six blocks
horizontally and six blocks vertically (48 x 48).
2. Lay out a grid and draw the image on the grid.
• Each square represents one dot
• Blacken squares for each printed dot
(7c)

3. Transfer the image into a bit map representation and then into hexadecimal format:

BIT MAP HEXADECIMAL FORMAT

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11110011C0 00 FF FF FF 03 03
11000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00010011C0 00 80 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00010011C0 00 80 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 10011111 11111111 11111111 00010011C0 00 9F FF FF 13 13
11000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00010011C0 00 80 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00010011C0 00 80 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 10011111 11111111 11111111 00010011C0 00 9F FF FF 13 13
11000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00010011C0 00 80 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00010011C0 00 80 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 11111111 11111111 11111111 11110011C0 00 FF FF FF F3 F3
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 13 13
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000111 11100000 00000000 00000011C0 00 07 E0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00001111 11110000 00000000 00000011C0 00 0F F0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00001111 11110000 00000000 00000011C0 00 0F F0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00001111 11110000 00000000 00000011C0 00 0F F0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00001111 11110000 00000000 00000011C0 00 0F F0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000111 11100000 00000000 00000011C0 00 07 E0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 00 00 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000001 10000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 01 80 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000011 11000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000001 10000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 01 80 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000011C0 00 03 C0 00 03 03
11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111 11111111FF FF FF FF FF FF FF

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-4 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

4. Using the hexadecimal data, send the following code to print the graphic image as designed.
<ESC>A<ESC>H0100<ESC>V0100<ESC>GH006006
FFFFFF FFFFFF FFFFFF FFFFFF C00000 000003
C00000 000003 C000FF FFFFF3 C00080 000013
C00080 000013 C0009F FFFF13 C00080 000013
C00080 000013 C0009F FFFF13 C00080 000013
C00080 000013 C000FF FFFFF3 C00000 000003
C00000 000003 C00000 000003 C00000 000003
C00000 000003 C00000 000003 C00003 C00003
C00007 E00003 C0000F F00003 C0000F F00003
C0000F F00003 C0000F F00003 C00007 E00003
C00003 C00003 C00000 000003 C00000 000003
C00000 000003 C00000 000003 C00001 800003
C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003
C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003
C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003 C00003
C00003 C00003 C00001 800003 C00000 000003
C00000 000003 FFFFFF FFFFFF FFFFFF FFFFFF
<ESC>Q1<ESC>Z

5. To send the data in binary format, the software must convert the data into binary format before transmitting it to
the printer. Using the BASIC programming language for example, this is done by notation “CHR$ (&HC0)”
which sends the hexidecimal value of “C0” as binary data (11000000). The BASIC program listing for sending
this graphic to the printer (using the RS232 port) in binary format is:
CLS
OPEN .COM2:9600,N,8,1,CS,DS. FOR OUTPUT AS #1E$ = CHR$(27)
PRINT #1,CHR$(2); E$; .A.; E$; .V0100"; E$; .H0100"; E$; .GB006006";
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HF3);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H80);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H13);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H80);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H13);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H9F);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&H13);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H80);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H13);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H80);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H13);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H9F);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H13);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H80);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H13);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H80);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H13);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRI NT #1,CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HF3);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H07);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H0F);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HF0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H0F);CHR$(&HF0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-5 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H0F);CHR$(&HF0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H0F);CHR$(&HF0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H07);CHR$(&HE0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H01);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H80);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H01);CHR$(&H80);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HC0);
PRI NT #1,CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H03);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HC0);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);CHR$(&H00);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&H03);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);
PRINT #1,CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);CHR$(&HFF);
PRINT #1,E$; .Q1"; E$; .Z"; CHR$(3)
CLOSE #1
The printer output for both the hexadecimal and binary format example is:

(7d)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-6 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

PCX GRAPHICS EXAMPLE

A graphics file in a PCX format may also be transmitted to the printer. The file must not be larger than 32K bytes
(DOS file size reported in a DIR listing). For example, the WIZ.PCX image shown below has a file size of 15076
bytes.

(7e)

The uncompressed size (PCX is a compressed file) of the file must not be greater than 64K bytes. Generally this is
not a problem unless the graphic image is surrounded by large amount of white space which the PCX algorithm
can compress very efficiently. If this is the case, the file should be recaptured to eliminate the surrounding white
space as much as possible. The following basic program will send and print this file:
OPEN .WIZ.PCX. FOR INPUT AS #2
DA$ = INPUT$(15706, #2)
C$ = CHR$(27)
WIDTH .LPT1:., 255
LPRINT C$; .A.;
LPRINT C$; .V150"; C$; .H100"; C$; .GP15706,.; DA$
LPRINT C$; .Q1"; C$; .Z";
CLOSE #2
The printer output for this program is:

(7f)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-7 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

CUSTOM PROTOCOL CODES

This chapter contains information on creating custom Protocol Command Codes. The Protocol Command Codes
tell the printer that a specific type of information is being transmitted to it. As an example, the Standard Protocol
Command Code specifies the use of an <ESC>character to tell the printer that the following character(s) will
represent a specific command. Sometimes the host computer is unable to generate the character or it uses the
<ESC> character to control another function. In this case, an Alternate Protocol Command Code set can be
selected for use. When the Alternate set is selected, the <ESC> character is not used and is instead replaced with
a “carrot” (^) character. A command stream would then start with an “^” instead of an “<ESC>”. These two sets of
Protocol Command Codes are adequate for the majority of all applications, but ocassionally situations occur where
conflicts exist when using the Alternate set. In these cases, the user can define and download a custom set of
Protocol Command Codes that are stored in non-voltile memory in the printer. After these are downloaded, they
replace the Alternate Command Code set.
The command for downloading a new set of Protocol Command Codes takes the form of
“<ESC>LD,a,b,c,d,e,f,g,h,i,j j”. The parameters specified for “a” through “i” can be transmitted in either ASCII
characters or hex notation, allowing a complete 128 character (except for the “,”) set to be used for selecting the
custom code.

PROTOCOL COMMAND CODES

PARAMETER STANDARD SETTING ALTERNATE SETTING

a STX {
b ETX }
c ESC ^
d ENQ @
e CAN !
g OFFLINE ]
h (Auto Online) No 0=Yes, 1=No
i (Zero Slash) No 0=Yes, 1=No
j j (Eurocharacter) D5 User defined

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-8 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

REFERENCE TABLES

TABLE 1: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>XU)

W5 X H9 CHARACTER SIZE, 12 DOTS/MM HEAD DENSITY, THREE-FOLD HEIGHT/WIDTH

TABLE 2: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>XS)

W17 X H17 CHARACTER SIZE, 12 DOTS/MM HEAD DENSITY, TWO-FOLD HEIGHT/WIDTH

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-9 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 3: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>XM)

W24 X H24 CHARACTER SIZE, 12 DOTS/MM HEAD DENSITY, ONE-FOLD HEIGHT/WIDTH

TABLE 4: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>XB)

W48 X H48 CHARACTER SIZE, 12 DOTS/MM HEAD DENSITY, ONE-FOLD HEIGHT/WIDTH

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-10 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 5: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>XL)

W48 X H48 CHARACTER SIZE, 12 DOTS/MM HEAD DENSITY, ONE-FOLD HEIGHT/WIDTH

TABLE 6: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>OA)

W24 X H24 CHARACTER SIZE, 12 DOTS/MM HEAD DENSITY, ONE-FOLD HEIGHT/WIDTH

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-11 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 7: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>OB)

W24 X H24 CHARACTER SIZE, 12 DOTS/MM HEAD DENSITY, ONE-FOLD HEIGHT/WIDTH

TABLE 8: PARAMETER A & B COMPARISON (<ESC>RD)

PARAMETER B CHARACTER SET FONT PARAMETER A

1 Latin 1 CG Univers V
2 Latin 2 CG Times t

3 Latin 5
4 Grk
5 Cyr
6 Arb CG Times t
7 PC-850 Futura F
CG Palcio P
CG Century Schoolbook S
CG Triumvirate G
CG Univers V
CG Times t

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-12 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 9: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>XCL/XCS)

SAME FONTS, DIFFERENT SIZES

TABLE 10: CHARACTER FONT SET (<ESC>X70-77)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-13 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 11: BARCODE TYPE (<ESC>B)

A BARCODE DESCRIPTION RATIO

Set print data including the Start/Stop characters.

A, B, C, D, E, N, T, a, b, c, d, e, n, t. When the barcode print data is [123], specify
0 NW-7 (Codabar) [A123A]. 1:3
Barcode character pitch is enabled.
For print data, refer to the NW-7 code table.
Set print data to include the Start/Stop Character [*]. When the barcode print data is
[12345], specify [*12345*].
1 CODE39 1:3
Barcode character pitch is enabled.
For print data, refer to the CODE39 code table.
Specify the print data in even-numbered digits. If specifying an odd-numbered digit, “0” will
2 Interleaved 2 of 5 be added to the head of the print data. 1:3
For print data, refer to the Interleaved 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
3 JAN/EAN13 Fixed
For print data, refer to the JAN/EAN13 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
4 JAN/EAN8 Fixed
For print data, refer to the JAN/EAN13 code table.
The barcode character pitch is enabled.
5 Industrial 2 of 5 1:3
For print data, refer to the Industrial 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode character pitch is enabled.
6 Matrix 2 of 5 1:3
For print data, refer to the Matrix 2 of 5 code table.
A MSI The print data can be specified up to 13 digits. Fixed
C CODE93 Refer to CODE93 <BC>. Fixed
E UPC-E Specify a 6 digit number for print data. Fixed
F BOOKLAND Specify a 2 to 5 digit number for print data. Fixed
G CODE128 Refer to CODE128 <BG>. Fixed
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
H UPC-A Fixed
For print data, refer to the UPC-A code table.
I UCC/EAN128 Refer to UCC/EAN128 <BI>. Fixed
P POSTNET Specify in 5, 6, 9, or 11 digits. Fixed

TABLE 12: BARCODE TYPE (<ESC>BD)

A BARCODE DESCRIPTION RATIO

Set print data including the Start/Stop characters.

A, B, C, D, E, N, T, a, b, c, d, e, n, t. When the barcode print data is [123], specify
0 NW-7 (Codabar) [A123A]. 2:5
Barcode character pitch is enabled.
For print data, refer to the NW-7 code table.
Set print data to include the Start/Stop Character [*]. When the barcode print data is
[12345], specify [*12345*].
1 CODE39 2:5
Barcode character pitch is enabled.
For print data, refer to the CODE39 code table.
Specify the print data in even-numbered digits. If specifying an odd-numbered digit, “0” will
2 Interleaved 2 of 5 be added to the head of the print data. 2:5
For print data, refer to the Interleaved 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
3 JAN/EAN13 Fixed
For print data, refer to the JAN/EAN13 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
4 JAN/EAN8 Fixed
For print data, refer to the JAN/EAN13 code table.
The barcode character pitch is enabled.
5 Industrial 2 of 5 2:5
For print data, refer to the Industrial 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode character pitch is enabled.
6 Matrix 2 of 5 2:5
For print data, refer to the Matrix 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
H UPC-A Fixed
For print data, refer to the UPC-A code table.
NOTE: The model composition ratio may not be available for some barcode types.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-14 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 13: BARCODE TYPE (<ESC>D)

A BARCODE DESCRIPTION RATIO

Set print data including the Start/Stop characters.

A, B, C, D, E, N, T, a, b, c, d, e, n, t. When the barcode print data is [123], specify
0 NW-7 (Codabar) [A123A]. 1:2
Barcode character pitch is enabled.
For print data, refer to the NW-7 code table.
Set print data to include the Start/Stop Character [*]. When the barcode print data is
[12345], specify [*12345*].
1 CODE39 1:2
Barcode character pitch is enabled.
For print data, refer to the CODE39 code table.
Specify the print data in even-numbered digits. If specifying an odd-numbered digit, “0” will
2 Interleaved 2 of 5 be added to the head of the print data. 1:2
For print data, refer to the Interleaved 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
3 JAN/EAN13 Fixed
For print data, refer to the JAN/EAN13 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
4 JAN/EAN8 Fixed
For print data, refer to the JAN/EAN13 code table.
The barcode character pitch is enabled.
5 Industrial 2 of 5 1:2
For print data, refer to the Industrial 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode character pitch is enabled.
6 Matrix 2 of 5 1:2
For print data, refer to the Matrix 2 of 5 code table.
The barcode will not have a guard bar and human readable information.
H UPC-A Fixed
For print data, refer to the UPC-A code table.
NOTE: The model composition ratio may not be available for some barcode types.

TABLE 14: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BC)

CODE 93

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-15 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 15: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BF)

BOOKLAND

TABLE 16: CODE128 DATA VALUES (<ESC>BG)

VALUE SUBSET A SUBSET B SUBSET C VALUE SUBSET A SUBSET B SUBSET C

0 SP SP 00 36 D D 36
1 ! ! 01 37 E E 37
2 “ “ 02 38 F F 38
3 # # 03 39 G G 39
4 $ $ 04 40 H H 40
5 % % 05 41 I I 41
6 & & 06 42 J J 42
7 ‘ ‘ 07 43 K K 43
8 . . 02 38 F F 38
9 ) ) 09 45 M M 45
10 * * 10 46 N N 46
11 + + 11 47 O O 47
12 , , 12 48 P P 48
13 - - 13 49 Q Q 49
14 . . 14 50 R R 50
15 / / 15 51 S S 51
16 0 0 16 52 T T 52
17 1 1 17 53 U U 53
18 2 2 18 54 V V 54
19 3 3 19 55 W W 55
20 4 4 20 56 X X 56
21 5 5 21 57 Y Y 57
22 6 6 22 58 Z Z 58
23 7 7 23 59 [ [ 59
24 8 8 24 60 \ \ 60
25 9 9 25 61 ] ] 61

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-16 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 16: CODE128 DATA VALUES (<ESC>BG)

VALUE SUBSET A SUBSET B SUBSET C VALUE SUBSET A SUBSET B SUBSET C

26 : : 26 62 ^ ^ 62
27 ; ; 27 63 __ __ 63
28 < < 28 64 NUL>(space) . >(space) 64
29 = = 29 65 SOH >! a or >! 65
30 >J >J 30 66 STX >" b or >" 66
31 ? ? 31 67 ETX ># c or ># 67
32 @ @ 32 68 EOT >$ d or >$ 68
33 A A 33 69 ENQ >% e or >% 69
34 B B 34 70 ACK >& f or >& 70
35 C C 35 71 BEL >. g or >. 71
72 BS >( h >( 72 89 EM >9 y >9 89
73 HT >) i >) 73 90 SUB >: z >: 90
74 LF >* j >* 74 91 ESC >; { >; 91
75 VT >+ k >+ 75 92 FS >< | >< 92
76 FF >, l >, 76 93 GS >= } >= 93
77 CR >- m >- 77 94 RS >> ~ >> 94
78 SO >. n >. 78 95 US >? DEL >? 95
79 SI >/ o >/ 79 96 FNC3 >@ FNC3 >@ 96
80 DLE >0 p >0 80 97 FNC2 >A FNC2 >A 97
81 DC1 >1 q >1 81 98 SHIFT >B SHIFT >B 98
82 DC2 >2 r >2 82 99 Subset C >C Subset C >C 99
83 DC3 >3 s >3 83 100 Subset B >D FNC4 >D Subset B >D
84 DC4 >4 t >4 84 101 FNC4 >E Subset A >E Subset A >E
85 NAK >5 u >5 85 102 FNC1 >F FNC1 >F FNC1 >F
86 SYN >6 v >6 86 103 SUBSET A START CODE >G
87 ETB >7 w >7 87 104 SUBSET B START CODE .H
88 CAN >8 x >8 88 105 SUBSET C START CODE >I

TABLE 17: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BI)

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5, MATRIX 2 OF 5, INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5, UPC-A, JAN/EAN8, JAN/EAN13, UPCC-E, UCC/EAN128, MSI

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-17 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 18: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BP)

POSTNET

TABLE 19: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BW)

NW-7

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-18 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 20: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BW)

CODE 39

TABLE 21: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BK)

PDF417 & MICRO PDF417

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-19 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 22: CHARACTER SIZE (<ESC>BK)

MICRO PDF417

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-20 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 23: DATA SIZE (<ESC>BQ)

QR (MODEL 1)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-21 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 24: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BQ)

QR CODE (NUMERIC MODE)

TABLE 25: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BQ)

QR CODE (ALPHANUMERIC MODE)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-22 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 26: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BQ)

QR CODE (BINARY MODE)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-23 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 27: CODE TABLE (<ESC>BV)

MAXI CODE

TABLE 28: FORMAT ID LIST (<ESC>BX)

ERROR CORRECTION FORMAT ID

01 02 03 04 05 06
00 (ECC000) 500 452 394 413 310 271
05 (ECC050) 457 333 291 305 228 200
08 (ECC080) 402 293 256 268 201 176
10 (ECC100) 300 218 190 200 150 131
14 (ECC140) 144 105 91 96 72 63
Numeric 3116
20 (ECC200) Alphanumeric 2335
Binary (01h ~ FFh) 1556

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-24 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 29: CODE TABLE (<ESC>FX)

DATA MATRIX

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-25 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 30: SYMBOL & DATA QUANTITY (<ESC>2D12)

MICRO PDF417

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-26 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 31: CODE TABLE (<ESC>2D12)

PDF417

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-27 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 32: CODE TABLE (<ESC>2D20)

MAXI CODE

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-28 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 33: DATA SIZE (<ESC>2D30)

QR CODE (MODEL 2)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-29 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 34: DATA SIZE (<ESC>2D31)

QR CODE (MODEL 1)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-30 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 35: CODE TABLE (<ESC>2D32)

QR CODE (NUMERIC MODE)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-31 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 36: CODE TABLE (<ESC>2D32)

QR CODE (ALPHANUMERIC MODE)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-32 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 37: CODE TABLE (<ESC>2D32)

QR CODE (BINARY MODE)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-33 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 38: CODE TABLE (<ESC>2D50)

DATA MATRIX CODE

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-34 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 39: PARAMETERS (<ESC>AR/AX)

RESOLUTION & PRINT AREA

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-35 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 40A: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PG)

CL408-412E, M8400RVE, CL608-612E, M5900RVE, M8485SE, M8490SE, M8460SE, M8459SE, M84PRO-2, M84PRO-3, M84PRO-6

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-36 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 40B: PARAMETRS (<ESC>PG)

CL408-412E, M8400RVE, CL608-612E, M5900RVE, M8485SE, M8490SE, M8460SE, M8459SE, M84PRO-2, M84PRO-3, M84PRO-6

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-37 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 41: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PG)

M10E

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-38 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 42: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PG)

XL400-410E

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-39 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 43A: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PG)

CT400-410

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-40 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 43B: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PG)

CT400-410

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-41 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 44A: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PC)

CL408-412E, M8400RVE, CL608-612E, M5900RVE, M8485SE, M8490SE, M8460SE, M8459SE, M84PRO-2, M84PRO-3, M84PRO-6

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-42 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 44B: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PC)

CL408-412E, M8400RVE, CL608-612E, M5900RVE, M8485SE, M8490SE, M8460SE, M8459SE, M84PRO-2, M84PRO-3, M84PRO-6

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-43 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 45: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PC)

M10E

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-44 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 46: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PC)

XL400-410E

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-45 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 47: PARAMETERS (<ESC>PC)

CT400-410

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-46 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 48: PARAMETERS (<ESC>LD)

FUNCTION PARAMETER CONTENT STANDARD DEFAULT NON-STANDARD DEFAULT

Proto Code a (Hex) STX 02H { (7BH)

b (Hex) ETX 03H } (7DH)
c (Hex) ESC 1BH ^ (5EH)
d (Hex) ENQ 05H @ (5EH)
e (Hex) CAN 18H ! (21H)
f (Hex) NULL 00H - (7EH)
g (Hex) Offline 40H ] (5DH)
Auto Online h (ASCII) 0: Yes, 1: No 0 (30H) 0 (30H)
Zero Slash i (ASCII) 0: Yes, 1: No 0 (30H) 0 (30H)
Euro Code j (Hex) D5H D5H D5H

TABLE 49: PARAMETERS (<ESC>EX)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-47 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 50: PARAMETERS (<ESC>AR)

TABLE 51: PARAMETERS (<ESC>G)

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-48 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 52: REFERENCE (<ESC>YS)

INVALID COMMANDS

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-49 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

TABLE 53: PARAMETERS (<ESC>&S)

TABLE 54: PARAMETERS (<ESC>GI)

MAXIMUM BYTES

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-50 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY

GLOSSARY
AC (Alternating Current) Electrical current that reverses its direction regularly and continually.
Accessory An optional assembly that may be used to provide an additional function.
RFID tags which use batteries as partial or complete source of power which are further
Active Tags differentiated by separating them into those with replaceable batteries and those which have
the batteries inside a sealed unit. Also referred to as Utilized Active Tags.
Addressability The ability to address bits, fields, files, or other portions of the storage in an RFID tag.
Advance To bring forward - the opposite of retract.
Allen Screw A screw whose head has a hexagonal recess to be driven by an allen wrench.
Aluminum A silvery, light-weight, metal that resists corrosion.
Anti-Static Resists static electricity.
A bow-like curved line or object.
Arc The band of sparks between to closely placed electrodes when current leaps the gap from one
to the other.
(American Standard Code for Information Interchange) The most common format for text files
in computers and on the internet. In a ASCII file, each alphabetic, numeric, or special
ASCII
character is represented with a 7-bit binary number (a string of seven 0s or 1s). 128 possible
characters are defined.
Assembly The fitting together of parts, components, or sub-assemblies to form a complete unit.
A type of two-way communication that occurs with a time delay, allowing participants to
respond at their own convenience. This communication allows characters to be sent at
Asynchronous
irregular intervals by preceding each character with a start bit and following it with a stop bit.
The timing of the transmission is not determined by the timing of the previous character.
Audible A sound loud enough to be heard.
Batch A grouping of anything.
The number of signaling elements that occur each second; or stated differently, the number of
changes to the transmission media per second in a modulated signal.
At slow speeds, one bit of information (signaling element) is encoded in each electrical
change. The baud therefore, indicates the number of bits per second (bps) that are
transmitted.
Assuming asynchronous communication, which requires 10 bits per character, this translates
Baud
to 30 characters per second (cps). For slow rates, (below 1200 baud), the baud can be divided
by 10 to see how many characters per second are sent.
At higher speeds, it is possible to encode more than 1 bit in each electrical change. Thusly,
4800 baud may allow 9600 bits to be sent each second.
At high data transfer speeds, data transmission rates are usually expressed in bits per second
(bps) rather than baud.
Capable of operating in two directions along the same plane or medium. In the case a
Bi-Directional
communication cable or an RFID tag, one that transmits as well as receives, read and written.
A numeral system that represents numeric values using two symbols, typically 0 and 1. A
Binary binary number can be represented by any sequence of bits (binary digits), which in turn may
be represented by any mechanism capable of being in two mutually exclusive states.
Refers to a single digit in the binary numeral system. A bit can either be on or off - a 1 or 0. A
Bits
byte is a collection of eight bits.
Shows the interconnections between system components by using a pictorial representation of
Block Diagram
a system and sub-systems linked to illustrate their relationships.
Bolt A threaded metal rod with a flanged head that is used with a nut to hold parts together.
Bore A hole in, or through something.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-51 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
Bytes A collection of 8 bits used in the binary system.
As it relates to RFID, the number of bits or bytes that can be programmed into a tag. This may
Capacity represent the bits accessible to the user or the total number - including those reserved to the
manufacturer (e.g., parity or control bits).
Capture Window/Field Region of the scanner field in which an RFID tag will operate.
A recessed area in something. In the case of a die set, the core is one of two part with the core
Cavity
being its mating half.
Chamfer To slice off the corners of an angle to create a beveled edge.
Character Any single numeral, letter, or symbol.
Chassis Assembly A group of components or sub-assemblies that comprise the base of an assembly.
Circumference The periphery of a circle or other rounded object - also the measurement of this distance.
A network of wires, resistors, and other electronic devices over which electrical impulses
Circuit
travel.
Clockwise To rotate from left to right.
As it relates to RFID, a system in which relevant data regarding the attributes of the object is
Closed Systems
stored in a common database accessible via data link by referencing the individual ID code.
Collar A sleeve applied to a rod, shaft, or pipe to prevent sideward motion.
Component A single part that may applied to others to form an assembly.
An object that is comprised of, or layered with, two or more materials to achieve a desired
Composite
outcome.
Concave A curved recess or hollow - the opposite of convex.
Concentric Multiple items that share a common center - example: a circle centered within a circle.
The arrangement of parts or components to operate in unison for a specific activity.
Configuration
To program software to enable, disable, or specify how various features will function.
Devices for joining electrical and electronic circuits through coupling. Typically, one mating half
Connector
is a plug (male) and the other is a socket (female).
Convex A spherical shaped surface - one that is curved outward.
The protruding portion of a die set. The core is one of two parts and the cavity being its mating
Core
half. The core is convexed and the cavity is concaved.
(Central Processing Unit) A programmable device that performs all the instruction, logic, and
mathematical processing in a computer - is the brains of the computer. The CPU is a microchip
CPU
that is installed on a motherboard (primary board) that coordinates hardware components.
Also referred to as “processor”.
Counter-Clockwise To rotate from right to left.
Couple Two mating halves that are connected - example: a plug or receptacle.
The X, Y, and Z axis all being equal in size - a three-dimensional object that is equally
Cubic
proportioned.
Current The flow or rate of flow of electric force.
A single revolution of a potentially reoccurring activity - in the case of printer, one label being
Cycle
printed.
DC (Direct Current) Electrical current flowing in a single direction.
Density The quantity within a given or specific area or unit.
Deviation A change in course or the measurement of that change.
A straight line from the outer edge of a circle, through the center, and onward to the opposite
Diameter
edge. Also the measurement of that distance (dimension).
Dimension Any measurable distance.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-52 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
Allows current to flow in one direction but not the other to protect sensitive electronics. A diode
Diode functions by compositing two conductive materials with one possessing low resistance to
electrical current on one side and high resistance on the other.
A group of tiny switches directly attached to a circuit board to enable configuration for a
Dipswitch Complex
particular type of application. These switches are two-position: On/Off.
The printing method that uses a chemically coated heat sensitive media. Once the heat from
the thermal printhead is applied to the media, the media darkens with the image.
Direct Thermal
Direct thermal printing does not require ribbon and is typically used in applications where the
label needs to endure for a year or less.
Disable To deactivate or make unable to function.
Divergent To deviate from the norm or to possess opposing positions.
DPI (Dots Per Inch) The quantity of printed dots within a square inch area - the print density.
(Dynamic Random Access Memory) DRAM is the most common kind of RAM and is a network
of electrically-charged points in which a computer stores quickly accessible data in the form of
DRAM
0s and 1s. Each storage or memory cell can be directly accessed if the intersecting row or
column is known. Each cell consists of a capacitor and a transistor.
The components and sub-assemblies that comprise the mechanical apparatus of motion or
Drive Train
kinetic energy.
Multiple items that do not share the same center - example: a circle whose center axis is not
Eccentric
the same as that of another to whom it is connected. The opposite of concentric.
E-Clip Type E snap ring.
(Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) Are ROM chips that do not have to
be removed to be rewritten. Nor does the entire chip have to be completely erased to change
EEPROM a specific portion. Changing the contents does not require additional dedicated equipment.
The localized application of an electric field to each cell erases the targeted cells which can be
rewritten. Since only 1 byte can be changed at a time, EEPROM’s are versatile but slow.
Electronic Label A label that has an electronic RFID tag embedded within.
Electromagnetic Coupling In RFID, a system that uses a magnetic field as means of transferring data or power.
In RFID, a system which uses the induction of voltage on a plate as a means of transferring
Electrostatic Coupling
data or power.
Ellipse An oval shape that is symmetrical on either side of its center when divided into quadrants.
Embossed Characters or graphics that are raised above the remaining surface.
Enable To activate or make able to function.
Encompass To surround, encircle, or contain.
(ECC) In RFID, supplemental bits in a data transfer used in conjunction with a polynominal
Error Correcting Code algorithm in order to compute the value of missing or erroneous data bits. Example: for a 32-bit
data transmission, seven additional bits are required.
Relative to RFID, a mode of data communication in which missing or erroneous bits are
Error Correcting Mode
automatically corrected.
Error Correcting Protocol Relative to RFID, the rules by which the error-correcting mode operates.
In RFID, the techniques used to ensure that only correct information is presented to the
Error Management
system’s user.
Error Rate In RFID, the number of errors per number of transactions.
In RFID, the electronics which drive an antenna. When coupled with antenna, they are
Exciter
collectively referred to as a scanner. Also referred to as a transmitter.
Expansion Port A plug accessing additional 1/0 capability on a computer or peripheral device.
Print media with a mark on the paper backing between each label for the label sensor to read.
Eye-Mark Media This mark is used by the printer to identify the end of the printed label so that the next up can
be properly positioned for printing.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-53 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
Relative to RFID, the programming of information into a tag occurring as part of the
Factory Programming
manufacturing process resulting in a read-only tag.
In RFID, programming that usually occurs before the tag is installed on the object to be
Field Programming identified enabling the introduction of data relevant to the specifics of the application. However,
the tag would typically have to be removed from its object.
In RFID, the ability to limit the operations that can be performed on portions of data fields
Field Protection
stored in a tag.
Fillet To round off the sharp edges of the angle.
Flange The projecting rim of an object used to keep another object or objects in place.
A form of rewritable memory chip that allows multiple memory locations to be erased or written
in one programming operation. Flash Memory is very high-speed and non-volatile - does not
Flash Memory
need power to maintain the stored information. Its information is stored in an array of floating
gate transistors called “cells”.
Font A type or style of letter or numeral characters used in written text.
The number of times a signal executes a complete excursion through its maximum and
Frequency
minimum values and returns to the same value. The number of vibration cycles.
Print media with a space between each label where only the paper backing exists. The
Gap Media printer’s sensor uses this “gap” to identify when the printed label ends and to properly position
the next label for printing.
A unit of measurement used to describe the nominal thickness of wire. The higher the gauge
Gauge
number, the smaller the diameter.
A system of toothed wheels meshed together so that the motion of one is passed on to the
Gear
others.
Gigabytes Used to describe data transfer rates or storage capacity of 1 billion bytes.
Groove An elongated slot cut into an object.
Radio waves or other electromagnetic radiation resulting from oscillations of electricity in a
Hertz
conductor. Also the measurement of those oscillations.
A numbering system composed of six letters (A-F) and ten numbers (0-9) used to condense
Hexidecimal
binary numbers.
A threaded rod having a flanged head that is comprised of six sides - a type of hardware used
Hex Screw
to attach two or more objects.
In engineering: a recess that does not penetrate completely through as a bore or orifice. Term
Hole
may be casually used in lieu of a bore or orifice.
Horizontal On a level plane ninety-degrees from vertical.
(Hertz) Radio waves or other electromagnetic radiation resulting from oscillations of electricity
Hz
in a conductor. Also the measurement of those oscillations.
Icon An image or picture that has a specific meaning.
I.D. Filter In RFID, software that compares a newly read ID with those in a database or set.
Idle Gear A toothed wheel that is not directly driven, but instead receives motion from another.
A non-toothed wheel that is not driven - in the case of printers, it is typically used to provide
Idle Roller
tension on a timing belt. Also referred to as “tension roller”.
Illuminate To give or emit light.
In RFID, systems that use the inducing of a current in a coil as a means of transferring data or
Inductive Coupling
power.
Intermittent Stopping and starting again at intervals.
In-Use Programming The ability to read from, and write to, an RFID tag while attached to its object.
Junction A place or point of joining or crossing.
Kinetic The science dealing with the motion of masses in relation to the forces acting on them.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-54 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
The button on a panel that may be pressed to send an electrical signal to influence a
Key
predetermined activity.
A physical object shaped in a manner so as to prevent unwanted movement or to ensure
Keyed
desired movement.
Kg (Kilogram) A unit of weight measure within the metric system.
Kilo-Bytes Used to describe data transfer rates or storage capacity of approximately 1000 bytes.
A rounded handle to facilitate the manual opening, closing, securing, or otherwise movement
Knob
of the object to which it is attached.
Knurled An item that has recessed grooves or elevated areas on its surface to increase manual grip.
Label Print media that has been used or printed upon that has adhesive on one side.
(Local Area Network) A computer network limited to the immediate area, consequently
LAN Interface capable of transmitting data at a very fast rate. Usually the computer is limited to the same
building, or floor of a building, as the periphery device.
An object that is designed to be moved from one position to another for the purpose of
Latch
preventing or allowing the opening of another object.
Lateral Movement to the left or to the right - horizontal movement.
(Liquid Crystal Display) A display technology involving optical glass panels whose opacity can
be controlled by electrical signals. A liquid crystal surface is sandwiched between two
LCD polarizing panels and when voltage is applied to certain areas, the crystal darkens. A light
source behind the panel transmits through the transparent crystals and is mostly blocked by
the darkened ones.
(Light Emitting Diode) A semiconductor light source that emits visible light or invisible infrared
LED radiation. The color of the emitted light depends on the chemical composition of the
semiconducting material used.
Lever An object that turns on a fixed point usually to engage or disengage a latch.
Laminate A film or sheet placed onto and adhered flatly over another material.
Relative to RFID, the functional period within which maintenance, adjustment, and repair is not
Life
reasonably expected.
Linear The measurement of length without consideration of other dimensions.
Print media that does not have a space between each label as does the eye-mark and gap
Linerless Media
type media. This media is continuous and is divided based on printer programming.
An active connection to another document, graphic, or address. By selecting the designated
Link
button, text, graphic, or screen location; one is taken to the predetermined linked location.
M (Meter) A unit of measure in the metric system equal to 39.37 inches.
(Megabytes) Used to describe data transfer rates or storage capacity of approximately 1
MB
million bytes depending on the manner of compression.
MM (Millimeter) A unit of measure in the metric system equal to 0.03937 (1/25) inches.
Media In printing, a batch of unprinted labels or tags.
Used to describe data transfer rates or storage capacity of approximately 1 million bytes
Megabytes
depending on the manner of compression.
Menu A display of items that may be chosen.
Meter A unit of measure in the metric system equal to 39.37 inches.
Millimeter A unit of measure in the metric system equal to 0.03937 (1/25) inches.
Module A self-contained unit that may be plugged into another unit to operate.
Multimeter A device that is used to measure output units relating to electrical current.
Memory Card Relative to RFID, a read/write or reprogrammable tag in credit card size.
Memory Modules A read/write or reprogrammable RFID tag.
In RFID, a vehicle equipped with a system for locating tagged vehicles, containers, and other
Mobile Inventory Vehicle
objects for the purpose of inventory control.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-55 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
Modulation In RFID, the methods of altering carriers in order to transmit the encoded information.
Nest A set of similarly shaped objects with one smaller and resting within the other.
Nominal The point between a positive and negative deviation which is considered to be optimum.
Nut A small metal block with a threaded hole through its center for screwing onto a bolt.
A milky-white, synthetic material used in manufacturing that is purchased in blocks and
Nylon Material
machined to the desired shape - resembles plastic.
In label printing, it is the repositioning distance that the printer must make after advancing the
Offset printed label for cutting or dispensing. The offset is the distance that the media must be
retracted following one of those activities so that printing may again take place.
Omni-Directional The ability of an RFID tag to operate in any orientation.
Orientation Having to do with the manner or angle of placement.
Orientation Sensitivity In RFID, the range or measurement of decreased readability by non-optimal orientation.
Orifice An opening for which something is to pass through - similar to a bore.
A typically circular object made of round, elastic material to provide a seal between two
O-Ring
objects.
Oscillate To move back and forth along a span.
Pan Head Screw A threaded rod with a rounded, flanged head used to attach multiple object together.
In printing applications, the temporary backing for print media. The paper is removed following
Paper
printing so the label may be applied.
Parallel Objects extending in the same direction maintaining the same distance part.
An interface between computer and printer where the computer sends multiple bits of
Parallel Interface
information to the printer simultaneously by sending each bit over a separate wire.
Parameter The span or area that something is allowed to exist or operate.
A simple form of error checking that is used in serial communication. A parity bit is a binary
digit that is added to a group of bits to detect the presence of an error. The parity bit take on
Parity the value of an 0 or a 1 to satisfy a constraint on the overall parity of a binary number. The
parity scheme in use must be specified as even or odd. Parity is even if there are an even
number of 1 bits, and odd otherwise. None may also be chosen.
Passive RFID tags that do not contain an internal power source. They are externally powered
Passive Tags
and typically derive their power from the carrier signal radiated from the scanner.
(Personal Computer) An electronic computing device that may be individually and
PC
independently used or coupled to other similar devices.
Perforation A series of through-holes in a material to facilitate tearing apart.
At right angles to a given line or plane - a vertical line is perpendicular to a horizontal one and
Perpendicular
vise-versa.
A black, synthetic material used in manufacturing that is purchased in blocks and machined to
Phenolic Material
the desired shape - resembles plastic.
Pinion Gear A smaller gear meshed with a larger one.
Pitch Physical top of form of media placed under the print head elements in the feed direction.
A synthetic material typically rigid in nature that is molded to its useful shape. Plastic is
Plastic
typically injection molded along with its color additive and may be of any color chosen.
Post A pin or shaft to which an object may be tethered or latched.
A variable resistor used to adjust voltage to affect various mechanical activities. This electronic
component is comprised of two terminals connected to either end of an resistive element and
Potentiometer
a conductor that can be moved between the two ends, thus allowing the creation of a resistor
or voltage divider.
Primary Something first in order or importance.
Print Assembly The sub-assembly of a printer that comprise the printing components.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-56 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
The device on a direct thermal or thermal transfer printer containing the heating elements that
Print Head
causes an image to be transferred to print media.
A programmable device that performs all the instruction, logic, and mathematical processing in
a computer - is the brains of the computer. The processor is a microchip that is installed on a
Processor
motherboard (primary board) that coordinates hardware components. Also referred to as
“CPU”.
Profile A side view of an item.
Program To enter or send to the processor, the control parameters for electronic equipment to operate.
Proportional To be equal.
A device that detects and signals the presence of a selected object at, or near, the sensor’s
Proximity Sensor
location.
Pulley A toothed wheel for providing movement to a belt.
Quadrant One quarter of the circumference of a circle.
Radial Branching out in equal distances from a common center.
A straight line from the center of a circle or sphere to its periphery - also the measurement of
Radius
its distance.
(Random Access Memory) A network of electrically-charged points in which a computer stores
RAM quickly accessible data in the form of 0s and 1s. Each storage or memory cell can be directly
accessed if the intersecting row or column is known.
Ratio The quotient of one quantity divided by another of the same kind.
Relative to RFID, a device containing the digital electronics which extract and separate the
Reader
information from the format definition and error management bits.
Relative to RFID, many applications require that new data or revisions to data already in the
Read/Write tag, be entered while it remains on the object. Some items with this capability of being re-
programmable are read/write tags, memory cards, or memory modules.
An area of temporary data storage to help compensate for differences in the transfer rate and
Receive Buffer
the processing ability of the printer.
Receptacle A female connector to which a male connector may be inserted - typically for electrical current.
A simple electro-mechanical switch made up of an electromagnet and a set of contacts.
Relays use a small amount of power to energize things that require a greater amount of
Relay energy.
Sometimes relays are serial connected so that one smaller relay activates a larger relay which
in turn, activates another larger still, and so on until the thing that is desired to be activated - is.
Retain To keep or to hold in place.
Retract To withdraw - the opposite of advance.
A two-terminal electrical or electronic component that resists the flow of current producing a
Resistor voltage drop between its terminals in accordance with Ohm’s law. This electrical resistance is
equal to the voltage drop across the resistor, divided by the current that is flowing through it.
RF/AIS (Radio Frequency Automatic Identification Systems)
Systems that communicate over a radio link between a host computer and a data source. RF/
RF/DC DC enhances the capabilities of automatic ID Systems by providing the capabilities of hare-
wire data communications without the physical restrictions interconnecting wires.
(Radio Frequency Identification) A method of identifying unique items using radio waves.
Typically, a reader communicates with a tag, which holds digital information in a microchip. But
RFID
there are chipless forms of RFID tags that use material to reflect back a portion of the radio
waves beamed at them.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-57 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
A system of finding the position or location of assets.
A microchip attached to an antenna that is packaged in a way that it can be applied to an
object. The tag picks up signals from, and sends signals to, a reader. The tag contains a
unique serial number, but may have other information and come in many forms, such as smart
RFID Tags labels that can have a barcode printed on it, or can simply be mounted inside a carton or
embedded in plastic. RFID tags can be active, passive, or semi-passive.
Each tag broadcasts a signal to be received by three reader antennas. The time each signal is
received is passed on to a software system that uses triangulation to calculate the location of
the asset.
A thin, flexible strip with layers of material; one of which contains ink used to produce an image
Ribbon
on print media.
Ribbon Core A thick cardboard sleeve onto which ribbon is wound.
Rigid Not flexible - stiff.
(Read-Only Memory) ROM is a memory chip. It is programmed with specific data when it is
manufactured. There are five basic types: ROM, PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, and Flash
Memory.
Each type has unique characteristics, but they all are types of memory that have two things in
ROM common: the stored data is non-volatile (not lost when power is removed) and the stored data
is unchangeable or requires a special operation to do so.
ROM chips contain a grid of columns and rows. A diode is used to connect the lines and gain
access to the data if the value is 1. If the value is 0, the lines are not connected and access is
denied.
RPM (Revolutions Per Minute) The number of cycles within the time span of one minute.
The path or course taken to get from one location to another - example: the routing of a cable
Route
within a machine.
(Serial Access Memory) Stores data as a series of memory cell that can only be accessed
SAM sequentially. Works very well for memory buffers where data is normally stored in the order in
which they will be used.
SBPL (SATO Basic Programming Language)
The units to measure distance - or a short tool for measurement.
Scale To increase or decrease the proportionate size of an object - example: text or graphics on a
printed label.
Scanner In RFID, an antennas transmitter and receiver electronics integrated in a single package.
Screen An electronic display.
Seat To nest or couple one object to another. The same as to nest.
Secondary The next to follow the primary in sequence or importance.
A SATO specific mode of printer operation that can execute the program of BASIC format in
SEMBL the printer. This allows the printer to be configured and operated without interfacing with an
external computer or software.
The degree of ease or difficult to gain a response - example: a sensor transmitter signal may
Sensitivity require increase to penetrate the thickness of print media in order to be receipted by its
receiver.
Sensor A device that responds to a physical stimulus and produces and electronic signal.
Separation The operational distance between two RFID tags.
Sequential One to follow another in a specified order - examples: 1, 2, 3; A, B, C.
A general-purpose interface that can be used for almost any type of device in which only 1 bit
Serial Interface
of communication is transmitted at a time.
Attachment hardware specifically used to secure an object may be moved in a specific position
Set Screw
or location.
Shaft Any rod, bar, or tube.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-58 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
Simultaneous To take place at the same time.
Sleeve A thin hollow material that is inserted onto another to provide proportionate spacing.
A circular clip that may be applied to a shaft, etc. to prevent another object from moving - used
Snap Ring
to retain objects in position.
An item that is not porous.
Solid
An item that is not transparent or translucent.
Any object of purpose to maintain a specific distance from two other objects - example: a
Spacer
sleeve or washer.
A shaft or rod that is fixed on one or both ends and spins on its axis while maintaining its
Spindle
projection.
(Static Random Access Memory) A type of memory that is faster and more reliable than the
SRAM more common DRAM. The term static is derived from the fact that it doesn’t need to be
refreshed like DRAM.
Stainless Steel A shiny, mirror-like carbon steel alloyed with chromium to inhibit rust.
Metal that contains a specific percentage of carbon. The percentage of carbon determines its
Steel
strength, in addition to how prone it is to rust.
Stepper Motor An electrical motor designed to rotate in both directions and to move in incremented distances.
Sub-Assembly A group of components assembled to form a complete unit that is a part of a larger unit.
A small mechanical device when altered sends an electrical signal to influence a
Switch
predetermined activity. Unlike a button or key, switches may have multiple positions.
The transmitter/receiver pair of transceiver plus the information storage mechanism attached
to the object. It is referred to as the tag, transponder, electronic label, code plate, and various
Tag
other terms. Although transponder is technically the most accurate, the most common term,
and the one preferred by the Automatic Identification Manufacturers, is tag.
The printing method that creates an image by transferring ink from a heat activated ribbon
onto the media using the heat from a thermal printhead.
A printhead is composed of a set of pins referred to as “elements” which may be selectively
heated through electrical induction. Regular paper media is used in this application in
Thermal Transfer
conjunction with the heat sensitive ribbon. The ribbon deposits a coating of dark material onto
the paper when exposed to intense heat.
Thermal transfer printing is more durable than direct thermal printing and is often used when a
label needs to endure longer than a year.
The science that deals with the relationship of heat and mechanical energy - also the
Thermodynamics
conversion of one into the other.
Threads The spiral grooves on the shaft of a screw,
The three projectories of an object: X axis is the distance left and right, the Y axis is the
Three-Dimensional
distance up and down, and the Z axis is the distance inward and outward.
A piece of wire bent into a spiral and connected on each end by different objects to allow them
Torsion Spring
to be pulled apart and then automatically return to their original position once released.
A device used to increase or decrease electricity’s voltage and current. The device consists of
one or more windings (typically copper) which, the ratio of the number of turns inversely
Transformer
determines the voltage change. The windings are wrapped around a magnetic core affecting
magnetic induction.
A device used to amplify a signal or open and close a circuit. Is constructed of a
Transistor semiconductive material and is comprised of three terminals where one can be used to control
the flow of current through the other two.
Translucent When a medium is of a condition so as to allow light to filter.
Transparent When a medium is of a condition so one can see through it unfettered.
Transponder The part of a tag that includes the antenna and that is used to emit a response to a signal.
Tread The act of an object making repetitive contact upon another that is in motion.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-59 PN: 9001096E

 Unit 7: Appendix

GLOSSARY
Troubleshoot The act of locating the source of a problem or problems.
Two of the projectories of an object: X axis is the distance left and right and the Y axis is the
Two-Dimensional
distance up and down. In a two-dimensional perspective, the Z axis is not recognized.
Uniform The state of multiple objects being the same.
Units Any fixed quantity, measure, etc.
(Universal Serial Bus) An external peripheral interface standard for communication between a
USB Interface
computer and external peripherals over a cable using bi-serial transmission.
Value The quantity for which a symbol stands.
Vertical A plane or axis that is plum - the Y axis.
Voltage The units of electrical force - the ampere current that flows through a conductor.
The amount of space occupied in three dimensions - cubic contents.
Volume
The strength or loudness of sound.
Washer A flat disk of metal, rubber, etc., used to make a seat for the head of a bolt, screw, or nut.
The amount of electrical power to operate an electrically powered device - arrived by
Wattage
multiplying amperage by voltage.
Wear To diminish in quality by repetitive activity.
Wireless Operates with electromagnetic waves and not with conducting wire.
Wiring Harness Multiple electrical wires bundled together.
A protocol for controlling the flow of data between computers and other devices on an
asychronous serial connection.

X-ON/X-Off For example, a computer typically sends data to a printer faster than the printer can print. The
printer contains a buffer where data is stored until it catches up, a small microprocessor in the
printer sends back an Xoff signal to stop sending data. When enough data is printed and the
buffer storage becomes free, the printer sends an Xon signal to resume sending data.

E/Pro Programming Reference 7-60 PN: 9001096E

 Section 8: SATO Group of Companies

SATO GROUP OF COMPANIES

E/Pro Programming Reference Page 8-1

SATO GROUP OF COMPANIES
Asia Pacific & Oceania Region SATO ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. SATO POLSKA SP. Z O.O.
in Ho Chi Minh City ul. Wrocławska 123, Radwanice,
SATO ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. Vietnam Representative Office 55-015 Św. Katarzyna, Poland
438B Alexandra Road #09-01/02, Level 6, Room 615.6, Me Linh Point Tower Tel: +48-71-381-03-60
Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119968 2 Ngo Duc Ke Street, District 1, Fax: +48-71-381-03-68
Tel: +65-6271-5300 Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Email: [email protected]
Fax: +65-6273-6011 Tel: +84-8-3520-3008 www.sato.pl
Email: [email protected] Fax: +84-8-3520-2800
www.satoasiapacific.com Email: [email protected] SATO IBERIA S.A.U.
www.satoasiapacific.com Dels Corrals Nous, 35-39
SATO AUTO-ID MALAYSIA SDN. BHD. Pol. Can Roqueta, 08202 - Sabadell
No.25, Jalan Pemberita U1/49, SATO AUSTRALIA PTY LTD. Barcelona, Spain
Temasya Industrial Park, Section U1, 1/1 Nursery Avenue, Clayton Business Tel: +34-902-333-341
40150 Shah Alam, Selangor Darul Ehsan, Park, Clayton, VIC 3168, Australia Fax: +34-902-333-349
Malaysia Tel: +61-3-8814-5330 Email: [email protected]
Tel: +60-3-7620-8901 Fax: +61-3-8814-5335 www.satoeurope.com
Fax: +60-3-5569-4977 Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected] www.satoaustralia.com SATO FRANCE S.A.S.
www.satoasiapacific.com Parc d'Activités, Rue Jacques Messager,
SATO NEW ZEALAND LTD. 59 175 Templemars, France
SATO AUTO-ID (THAILAND) CO., LTD. 30 Apollo Drive, Mairangi Bay Tel: +33-3-20-62-96-40
292/1 Moo 1 Theparak Road, Auckland, New Zealand Fax: +33-3-20-62-96-55
Tumbol Theparak, Amphur Muang, Tel: +64 9-477-2222 Email: [email protected]
Samutprakarn 10270, Thailand Fax: +64-9-477-2228 www.satoeurope.com
Tel: +66-2-736-4460 Email:
Fax: +66-2-736-4461 [email protected] SATO UK LTD.
Email: [email protected] www.satonewzealand.com Valley Road, Harwich,
www.satothailand.co.th Essex CO12 4RR, United Kingdom
European Region Tel: +44-1255-240000
SATO SHANGHAI CO., LTD. Fax: +44-1255-240111
307 Haining Road, ACE Bldg, SATO LABELLING SOLUTIONS Email: [email protected]
10th Floor, Hongkou Area, EUROPE GmbH (GERMANY) www.satouk.com
Shanghai 200080, China Ersheimer Straße 71,
Tel: +86-21-6306-8899 69434 Hirschhorn, Germany American Region
Fax: +86-21-6309-1318 Tel: +49-6272-9201-0
Email: [email protected] Fax: +49-6272-9201-399 SATO AMERICA, INC.
www.satochina.com Email: [email protected] 10350-A Nations Ford Road, Charlotte,
www.satoeurope.com NC 28273, U.S.A.
SATO ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. Tel: +1-704-644-1650
Korea Representative Office SATO BENELUX B.V. (NETHERLANDS) Fax: +1-704-644-1662
6F, Korea Housing Center, Techniekweg 1b, 3481 MK Harmelen, www.satoamerica.com
Yeouido-dong 45-11, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Netherlands
Seoul 150-736, Korea Tel.: +31-348-444437 SATO LABELING SOLUTIONS
Tel: +82-2-761-5072 Fax: +31-348-446403 AMERICA, INC.
Fax: +82-2-761-5073 Email: [email protected] 1140 Windham Parkway, Romeoville,
Email: [email protected] www.satoeurope.com Illinois 60446, U.S.A.
www.satokorea.com Tel: +1-630-771-4200
SATO LABELLING SOLUTIONS Fax: +1-630-771-4210
SATO ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. EUROPE GmbH (ITALY) www.satolabeling.com
India Representative Office Viale Europa 39/1,
Regus Level 2, Connaught Place, 20090 Cusago, Milano, Italy
Bund Garden Road, Pune. 411001, India Tel.: +39-02-903-944-64
Tel: +91-20-4014-7747 Fax: +39-02-903-940-35
Fax: +91-20-4014-7576 Email: [email protected]
Email: [email protected] www.satoeurope.com
www.satoasiapacific.com

• Latest contact information of worldwide SATO operations can be

found on the Internet at www.satoworldwide.com